The column program The whole world of ion chromatography 2 Metrohm – the comprehensive solution 3 Metrohm has become a synonym for ion chromatography. For more than 30 years, Metrohm has been offering innovative and creative solutions in the area of IC separation columns and IC devices. 4 Welcome to the world of ion chromatography 5 With high-tech, long years of applications know-how, Swiss quality standards and a reasonable pricing policy, for procurement as well as for maintenance, Metrohm guarantees the optimum solution in ion chromatography. Welcome to Metrohm! Table of contents 6 Separation columns from Metrohm 10 IC anion-separation columns for analyses iColumn 11 with chemical suppression 48 Phenomenex Star-Ion A300™ - 100/4.6 Which column for which application? 12 (6.1005.100) 50 Preselection 13 Phenomenex Star-Ion A300™ HC - 100/10.0 A) Anions without chemical suppression 13 (6.1005.110) 52 B) Anions with chemical suppression 14 Metrosep A Supp 1 - 250/4.6 (6.1005.300) 54 C) Oxidizable anions 16 Metrosep A Supp 1 HS - 50/4.6 (6.1005.350) 56 D) Cations without chemical suppression 17 Metrosep A Supp 3 - 250/4.6 (6.1005.320) 58 E) Cations with chemical suppression 18 Metrosep A Supp 5 - 50/4.0 (6.1006.550) 60 F) Organic acids 18 Metrosep A Supp 5 - 100/4.0 (6.1006.510) 62 G) Carbohydrates 19 Metrosep A Supp 5 - 150/4.0 (6.1006.520) 64 H) Amino acids 19 Metrosep A Supp 5 - 250/4.0 (6.1006.530) 66 Metrosep A Supp 7 - 150/4.0 (6.1006.620) 68 Capacity of the separation columns 20 Metrosep A Supp 7 - 250/4.0 (6.1006.630) 70 Position of the system peak 21 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 50/4.0 (6.1020.050) 72 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 75/4.0 (6.1020.070) 74 «MCS» Metrohm CO Suppressor 22 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 100/4.0 (6.1020.010) 76 2 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 250/4.0 (6.1020.030) 78 Flexibility in application thanks to Metrosep A Supp 16 - 100/4.0 (6.1031.410) 80 free selection of the pH value 23 Metrosep A Supp 16 - 150/4.0 (6.1031.420) 82 Metrosep A Supp 16 - 250/4.0 (6.1031.430) 84 Standards 24 Metrosep A Supp 17 - 100/4.0 (6.01032.410) 86 ABCs of practical work 26 Metrosep A Supp 17 - 150/4.0 (6.01032.420) 88 Metrosep A Supp 17 - 250/4.0 (6.01032.430) 90 Tips for eluent preparation 28 Inline Eluent Preparation 29 Microbore IC anion-separation columns for lower eluent consumption and greater sensitivity 92 Separation columns 30 Metrosep A Supp 4 - 250/2.0 (6.01021.230) 94 IC anion-separation columns for analyses Metrosep A Supp 5 - 150/2.0 (6.1006.220) 96 without chemical suppression 30 Metrosep A Supp 5 - 250/2.0 (6.1006.230) 98 Hamilton PRP-X100 - 125/4.0 (6.1005.000) 32 Metrosep A Supp 7 - 150/2.0 (6.1006.640) 100 Hamilton PRP-X100 - 250/4.0 (6.1005.010) 34 Metrosep A Supp 7 - 250/2.0 (6.1006.650) 102 Super-Sep - 100/4.6 (6.1009.000) 36 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 50/2.0 (6.1020.250) 104 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 75/2.0 (6.1020.270) 106 IC anion-separation columns for analyses Metrosep A Supp 10 - 100/2.0 (6.1020.210) 108 with or without chemical suppression 38 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 150/2.0 (6.1020.220) 110 Metrosep Anion Dual 2 - 75/4.6 (6.1006.100) 40 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 250/2.0 (6.1020.230) 112 Metrosep Anion Dual 3 - 100/4.0 (6.1006.120) 42 Metrosep A Supp 16 - 100/2.0 (6.1031.210) 114 Metrosep Dual 4 - 100/4.6 (6.1016.030) 44 Metrosep A Supp 16 - 150/2.0 (6.1031.220) 116 Metrosep A Supp 4 - 250/4.0 (6.1006.430) 46 Metrosep A Supp 16 - 250/2.0 (6.1031.230) 118 IC separation columns for the Microbore IC cation-separation columns for lower 7 determination of organic acids – eluent consumption and greater sensitivity 178 ion-exclusion chromatography 120 Metrosep C 4 - 100/2.0 (6.1050.210) 180 Hamilton PRP-X300 - 250/4.0 (6.1005.030) 122 Metrosep C 4 - 150/2.0 (6.1050.220) 182 Metrosep Organic Acids - 100/7.8 (6.1005.210) 124 Metrosep C 4 - 250/2.0 (6.1050.230) 184 Metrosep Organic Acids - 250/7.8 (6.1005.200) 126 Metrosep C 6 - 100/2.0 (6.01051.210) 186 Metrosep C 6 - 150/2.0 (6.01051.220) 188 IC carbohydrate-separation columns – anion- Metrosep C 6 - 250/2.0 (6.01051.230) 190 exchange chromatography applying pulsed amperometric detection (PAD) 128 IC cation-separation columns for analyses Metrosep Carb 2 - 100/4.0 (6.1090.410) 130 with chemical suppression 192 Metrosep Carb 2 - 150/4.0 (6.1090.420) 132 Metrosep C Supp 1 - 100/4.0 (6.1052.410) 194 Metrosep Carb 2 - 250/4.0 (6.1090.430) 134 Metrosep C Supp 1 - 150/4.0 (6.1052.420) 196 Hamilton RCX-30 - 150/4.6 (6.1018.010) 136 Metrosep C Supp 1 - 250/4.0 (6.1052.430) 198 Hamilton RCX-30 - 250/4.6 (6.1018.000) 138 Separation column for the determination Microbore IC carbohydrate-separation columns of organic substances 200 for lower eluent consumption and greater MetroSil RP 3 - 150/4.0 (6.01070.420) 202 sensitivity 140 Metrosep Carb 2 - 100/2.0 (6.01090.210) 142 IC guard columns (precolumns) 204 Metrosep Carb 2 - 150/2.0 (6.01090.220) 144 IC guard column cartridge for Hamilton PRP-X100 Metrosep Carb 2 - 250/2.0 (6.01090.230) 146 (6.1005.020) 206 Super-Sep Guard/4.6 (6.1009.010) 207 IC amino acid-separation column with Metrosep Dual 4 Guard Column Kit (6.1016.500) 208 optical detection after post-column reaction 148 Metrosep A Supp 1 Guard/4.6 (6.1005.340) 209 Metrosep Amino Acids 1 - 100/4.0 (6.4001.410) 150 Metrosep A Supp 4 Guard/4.0 (6.01021.500) 210 Metrosep A Supp 4 S-Guard/4.0 (6.01021.510) 210 IC cation-separation columns for analyses Metrosep A Supp 4 Guard/2.0 (6.01021.600) 211 without chemical suppression 152 Metrosep A Supp 4 S-Guard/2.0 (6.01021.610) 211 Nucleosil 5SA - 125/4.0 (6.1007.000) 154 Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/4.0 (6.1006.500) 212 Metrosep C 3 - 100/4.0 (6.1010.410) 156 Metrosep A Supp 5 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1006.540) 212 Metrosep C 3 - 150/4.0 (6.1010.420) 158 Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/2.0 (6.1006.600) 213 Metrosep C 3 - 250/4.0 (6.1010.430) 160 Metrosep A Supp 5 S-Guard/2.0 (6.1006.610) 213 Metrosep C 4 - 50/4.0 (6.1050.450) 162 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/4.0 (6.1020.500) 214 Metrosep C 4 - 100/4.0 (6.1050.410) 164 Metrosep A Supp 10 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1020.510) 214 Metrosep C 4 - 150/4.0 (6.1050.420) 166 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard HC/4.0 (6.1020.520) 214 Metrosep C 4 - 250/4.0 (6.1050.430) 168 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/2.0 (6.1020.600) 215 Metrosep C 5 - 150/4.6 (6.4000.320) 170 Metrosep A Supp 10 S-Guard/2.0 (6.1020.610) 215 Metrosep C 6 - 100/4.0 (6.1051.410) 172 Metrosep A Supp 16 Guard/4.0 (6.1031.500) 216 Metrosep C 6 - 150/4.0 (6.1051.420) 174 Metrosep A Supp 16 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1031.510) 216 Metrosep C 6 - 250/4.0 (6.1051.430) 176 Metrosep A Supp 16 Guard/2.0 (6.1031.600) 217 8 Metrosep A Supp 16 S-Guard/2.0 (6.1031.610) 217 IC trap columns 238 Metrosep A Supp 17 Guard/4.0 (6.01032.500) 218 Metrosep A Trap 1 - 100/4.0 (6.1014.000) 240 Metrosep A Supp 17 S-Guard/4.0 (6.01032.510) 218 Metrosep C Trap 1 - 100/4.0 (6.1015.000) 241 Metrosep Organic Acids Guard/4.6 (6.1005.250) 219 Metrosep RP Trap 1 - 50/4.0 (6.1014.100) 242 Metrosep Carb 2 Guard/4.0 (6.1090.500) 220 Metrosep RP Trap 2 - 100/4.0 (6.1014.150) 243 Metrosep Carb 2 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1090.510) 220 Metrosep I Trap 1 - 100/4.0 (6.1014.200) 244 Metrosep Carb 2 Guard/2.0 (6.01090.600) 221 Metrosep BO 3- Trap 1 - 100/4.0 (6.1015.200) 245 3 Metrosep Carb 2 S-Guard/2.0 (6.01090.610) 221 Metrosep CO 2- Trap 1 - 100/4.0 (6.1015.300) 246 3 Nucleosil 5SA 2 Guard Cartridge/4.0 (6.1007.110) 222 Metrosep C 3 Guard/4.0 (6.1010.450) 223 IC sample-preparation cartridges 248 Metrosep C 3 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1010.460) 223 IC sample-preparation cartridge IC-RP (6.1012.X00) 250 Metrosep C 4 Guard/4.0 (6.1050.500) 224 IC sample-preparation cartridge IC-H (6.1012.X10) 250 Metrosep C 4 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1050.510) 224 IC sample-preparation cartridge IC-Ag (6.1012.X20) 250 Metrosep C 4 S-Guard - 50/4.0 (6.1050.530) 224 IC sample-preparation cartridge IC-OH (6.1012.X30) 251 Metrosep C 4 Guard/2.0 (6.1050.600) 225 IC sample-preparation cartridge IC-Na (6.1012.X40) 251 Metrosep C 4 S-Guard/2.0 (6.1050.610) 225 IC sample-preparation cartridge IC-C18 (6.1012.X50) 251 Metrosep C 6 Guard/4.0 (6.1051.500) 226 Metrosep C 6 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1051.510) 226 IC accessories parts 252 Metrosep C 6 Guard/2.0 (6.01051.600) 227 PEEK inline filter (6.2821.120) 253 Metrosep C 6 S-Guard/2.0 (6.01051.610) 227 Coupling safety olive with PEEK inline filter Metrosep C Supp 1 Guard/4.0 (6.1052.500) 228 (6.2744.180) 253 Metrosep C Supp 1 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1052.510) 228 Metrosep RP 2 Guard/3.5 (6.1011.030) 229 Metrosep RP 3 Guard HC/4.0 (6.1011.040) 230 MetroSil RP 3 Guard/4.0 (6.01070.500) 231 Metrosep BP 1 Guard/2.0 (6.1015.100) 232 Preconcentration columns 234 Metrosep A PCC 2/4.0 (6.1006.330) 236 Metrosep A PCC 2 HC/4.0 (6.1006.340) 236 Metrosep A PCC 2 VHC/4.0 (6.1006.350) 236 Metrosep C PCC 1/4.0 (6.1010.300) 237 Metrosep C PCC 1 HC/4.0 (6.1010.310) 237 Metrosep C PCC 1 VHC/4.0 (6.1010.320) 237 9 Separation columns from Metrohm 10 Separation columns from Metrohm are the backbone of This flexibility guarantees top performance. The new high-performance analytics in ion chromatography. The 2 mm columns enable reduced eluent consumption, low combination of Metrohm IC separation columns and detection limits, and universal use. Metrohm IC systems guarantees: • High separating efficiency Ion chromatography with Metrohm systems can be • Short analysis times carried out with or without chemical suppression. • Excellent reproducibility Therefore, the application determines the pH value and • Long lifetime not the other way around. A large selection of anion • Low costs eluents is thus available: • Phthalate Metrohm offers the right separation columns for all dis- • Benzoate ciplines in ion chromatography: • Borate • Anions with or without suppression • Hydrogen carbonate • Organic acids • Carbonate • Cations with or without suppression • Hydroxide • Transition metals • Carbohydrates Metrohm is the comprehensive solution for applications • Amines in ion chromatography. For more than 30 years, Metrohm • Amino acids has been offering innovative and creative solutions in the area of IC separation columns and IC instruments. A A small number of separation columns are sufficient for comprehensive network of application laboratories is solving the majority of application problems. Metrohm available worldwide to provide the correct answers to offers the correct column material, both for standard analytical questions: on-site, quickly, and focused on the applications and for complex separation tasks: customer. The Internet (www.metrohm.com) provides an • Polystyrene divinylbenzene extensive database with information and problem solu- • Polyvinyl alcohol tions for all areas of ion analysis. • Polymethacrylate • Silica gel Metrohm – the whole world of ion chromato- • Monolith graphy iColumn The world's first intelligent column generation in The iColumn concept is flexible and 11 ion chromatography – just click and start encomp asses the following data types: • All column data available immediately • Freely definable data, e.g. • Active monitoring of all important column functions - Column name • Uninterrupted retraceability of all column parameters - Comment field in which, for example, the name of the application can be entered Intelligent columns, built into all Metrohm IC instruments • Data permanently linked with the column, e.g. – the MagIC Net software registers immediately which - Column type (e.g. Metrosep A Supp 10 - 100/4.0) separation columns are available to the IC system. One - Order number click, and the software detects such typical standard - Serial number conditions for columns as standard eluents and flow - Standard flow rate, the permissible maximum values for pressure and - Standard eluent flow, and the correct guard column. This data and other - Standard injection volume information are applied in the method if desired. As a - Standard temperature result, it is no longer necessary to enter all of this data - Length x inner diameter into the method. The iColumn knows how many hours it - Particle size has already been in operation and how many samples it - pH range has already analyzed. MagIC Net monitors the separating - Maximum permitted pressure efficiency of the column and switches the system off in - Maximum permitted flow rate the event that the permissible pressure is exceeded. If the • Data entered by the IC system and the MagIC Net performance of the column falls below a previously software, e.g. defined value, then MagIC Net can even have the col- - Operating hours umn reordered automatically by E-mail. - Number of injections - Maximum pressure If the Metrosep separation column is used in different - Maximum flow used systems, then it will take along all information stored on its memory chip to the next IC system. This allows for With the exception of the Metrosep Anion Dual 2 - uninterrupted traceability and GLP monitoring, even on 75/4.6 (6.1006.100), all Metrosep separation columns different IC devices, for all columns used. System valida-are available exclusively as iColumns. Excluded from tion is simplified significantly. this are the other column types, i.e. guard, preconcentration, and trap columns as well as sepa ration columns which do not have the Metrosep designation. 12 Which column for which application? Find the column finder online under https://www.metrohm.com/Column-Finder Preselection Anions Anions High concentration without suppression  A 13 Simple setup HBO 2– 3 H SiO 2– 2 4 no HPO 2– 4 Entire concentration with suppression  B spectrum Oxidizable anions Amperometric detection  C Cations without suppression  D with suppression  E Additional analytes Organic acids with or without  F suppression Carbohydrates  G Amino acids Post-column reactions with ninhydrin  H This symbol indicates the respective standard √ column A) Anions without chemical suppression Requirements or application Column Page No F– IC anion column Simple separation problems Metrosep A Supp 4 - 250/x.0 Simple matrices 6.1006.430 (250/4.0) 46 Rapid separation 6.01021.230 (250/2.0) 94 F– IC anion column Difficult separation problems Metrosep Anion Dual 2 - 75/4.6 Difficult matrices 6.1006.100 40 No F– IC anion column Difficult separation problems Metrosep Anion Dual 3 - 100/4.0 √ Difficult matrices 6.1006.120 42 Biological samples Cl–, NO –, SO 2– IC anion columns 3 4 Difficult matrices (e.g. dyes) Hamilton PRP-X100 HBO 2–, H SiO 2– 6.1005.000 (125/4.0) 32 3 2 4 6.1005.010 (250/4.0) 34 No F–, acetate IC anion column Difficult matrices Super-Sep - 100/4.6 Special applications (e.g. BF –) 6.1009.000 36 4 B) Anions with chemical suppression 14 Requirements or application Column Page F–, formate, acetate, Cl– IC anion column SO 2–, SO 2– Metrosep Anion Dual 2 - 75/4.6 3 4 Simple matrices 6.1006.100 40 Standard anions ClO –, ClO –, ClO –, BrO – 2 3 4 3 Special separation problems F–, formate, acetate, Cl– IC anion column SO 2–, SO 2– Metrosep Anion Dual 3 - 100/4.0 3 4 Simple matrices 6.1006.120 42 Standard anions ClO –, ClO –, ClO –, BrO – 2 3 4 3 Special separation problems Biological samples Perchlorate in difficult matrices, EPA 314 IC anion column (Monolith) Very high ionic strength Metrosep Dual 4 - 100/4.6 6.1016.030 44 Great differences in concentration IC anion column High ionic strength Metrosep A Supp 1 - 250/4.6 ClO –, ClO –, ClO –, BrO – 6.1005.300 54 2 3 4 3 SCN–, SO 2–, SO 2–, S O 2– IC anion column 3 4 2 3 Polyphosphates Metrosep A Supp 3 - 250/4.6 6.1005.320 58 Standard anions IC anion column √ Difficult matrices Metrosep A Supp 4 - 250/x.0 Critical samples 6.1006.430 (250/4.0) 46 I– 6.01021.230 (250/2.0) 94 Standard anions IC anion columns F–, Cl–, Br–, I– Metrosep A Supp 5 ClO –, ClO –, ClO –, BrO – 6.1006.550 (50/4.0) 60 2 3 4 3 BrO – at high ionic strength 6.1006.510 (100/4.0) 62 3 Cr(VI) (CrO 2–) √ 4 6.1006.520 (150/4.0) 66 I– (not with 250 mm) 64 Method development Universal applications 6.1006.530 (250/4.0) 66 Difficult matrices 6.1006.220 (150/2.0) 96 Difficult separation problems 6.1006.230 (250/2.0) 98 Rapid separation (with 50 and 100 mm) PO 3– in soft drinks (with 100 mm) 4 IC-MS coupling Applications with gradient Standard anions IC anion columns Oxohalides, EPA 300 (with 250 mm) Metrosep A Supp 7 Isocratic separation of glycolate and acetate 6.1006.620 (150/4.0) 68 Difficult separations 6.1006.630 (250/4.0) 70 Bayer liquors 6.1006.640 (150/2.0) 100 Applications with gradient 6.1006.650 (250/2.0) 102 Requirements or application Column Page 15 Anions in salt solutions Metrosep Carb 2 - 100/x.0 6.1090.410 (100/4.0) 130 6.01090.210 (100/2.0) 142 PO 3– in soft drinks with cyclamate IC anion columns 4 Standard anions (no F–) Metrosep A Supp 10 SCN–, SO 2–, SO 2–, S O 2– 6.1020.050 (50/4.0) 72 3 4 2 3 Separation SO 2–, SO 2– 6.1020.070 (75/4.0) 74 3 4 Aerosols with PILS/MARGA (75 mm) 6.1020.010 (100/4.0) 76 Air analytics 6.1020.030 (250/4.0) 78 IC-MS coupling 6.1020.250 (50/2.0) 104 Aggressive matrices 6.1020.270 (75/2.0) 106 6.1020.210 (100/2.0) 108 6.1020.220 (150/2.0) 110 6.1020.230 (250/2.0) 112 Standard anions IC anion columns Universal applications Metrosep A Supp 16 - 100/x.0 Non-critical matrices 6.1031.410 (100/4.0) 80 BrO - (EPA 326, DIN EN ISO 11206) 6.1031.210 (100/2.0) 114 3 IC-MS coupling Standard anions IC anion columns √ Universal applications Metrosep A Supp 16 - 150/x.0 Complex matrices 6.1031.420 (150/4.0) 82 IC-MS coupling 6.1031.220 (150/2.0) 116 Standard anions IC anion columns Universal applications Metrosep A Supp 16 - 250/x.0 Oligosaccharides and polysaccharides 6.1031.430 (250/4.0) 84 Cl–, SO 2– in electroplating baths 6.1031.230 (250/2.0) 118 4 Silicate in addition to standard anions (4 mm column) Quality monitoring of high-purity chemicals (e.g. conc. acids) Complex separation problems Difficult matrices IC-MS coupling Standard anions IC anion columns Water analysis Metrosep A Supp 17 - xx0/4.0 6.01032.410 (100/4.0) 86 6.01032.420 (150/4.0) 88 6.01032.430 (250/4.0) 90 Short retention times IC anion column No Cl– Phenomenex Star-Ion A300™ - 100/4.6 6.1005.100 50 BrO – at high ionic strength (EPA 326, DIN EN ISO IC anion column 3 11206) Phenomenex Star-Ion A300™ HC - 100/10.0 6.1005.110 52 C) Oxidizable anions 16 Requirements or application Column Page CN– IC anion column S2– Metrosep A Supp 1 - 250/4.6 6.1005.300 54 CN– IC anion column S2– Metrosep A Supp 10 - 100/x.0 √ 6.1020.010 (100 x 4.0) 76 6.1020.210 (100 x 2.0) 108 ClO –, NO –, S O 2–, SCN–, I– IC anion column 2 2 2 3 Super-Sep - 100/4.6 6.1009.000 36 Br–, I– IC anion column Metrosep Anion Dual 2 - 75/4.6 6.1006.100 40 NO –, ClO – IC anion column 2 2 S O 2–, SCN–, I– Metrosep A Supp 5 - 100/4.0 2 3 6.1006.510 62 D) Cations without chemical suppression Requirements or application Column Page 17 Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH + IC cation column 4 Very rapid separations Metrosep C 4 - 50/4.0 Simple matrices 6.1050.450 162 Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH + IC cation columns 4 Lipophilic amines with short retention times Metrosep C 4 - 100/x.0 Rapid separations 6.1050.410 (100/4.0) 164 6.1050.210 (100/2.0) 180 Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH + IC cation columns 4 √ Transition metals Metrosep C 4 - 150/x.0 Amines 6.1050.420 (150/4.0) 166 6.1050.220 (150/2.0) 182 Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH +, Mn2+, IC cation columns 4 Co2+, Ni2+, Zn2+, Cd2+, Pb2+, amines Metrosep C 4 - 250/x.0 NH +, ethanolamines 6.1050.430 (250/4.0) 168 4 Na+/NH + separation 6.1050.230 (250/2.0) 184 4 NH +, methylamines, and ethylamines 4 Transition metals Difficult separation problems Great differences in concentration Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH + IC cation column 4 Lipophilic amines with short retention times Metrosep C 6 - 100/x.0 Rapid separations 6.1051.410 (100/4.0) 172 6.01051.210 (100/2.0) 186 Amines IC cation column Transition metals Metrosep C 6 - 150/x.0 Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH + 6.1051.420 (150/4.0) 174 4 6.01051.220 (150/2.0) 188 Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH +, Co2+, IC cation columns 4 Ni2+, Zn2+, Cd2+, Pb2+, Amine Metrosep C 6 - 250/x.0 Very good Na+/NH + separation 6.1051.430 (250/4.0) 176 4 NH +, (CH )NH +, (CH ) NH +, (CH ) NH+, (CH ) N+, 6.01051.230 (250/2.0) 190 4 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 4 and the respective ethanolamines Difficult separation problems Great differences in concentration Transition metals Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH +, Co2+, IC cation columns 4 Ni2+, Zn2+, Cd2+, Pb2+, amines Metrosep C 3 NH +, monoethanolamine 6.1010.410 (100/4.0) 156 4 Transition metals 6.1010.420 (150/4.0) 158 Na+/NH + separation 6.1010.430 (250/4.0) 160 4 Matrices with high pH Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, Fe2+, Co2+, Ni2+, Cd2+, Zn2+, Mn2+ IC cation column 154 Mg2+, Ca2+ in addition to large amounts of Na+ Nucleosil 5SA - 125/4.0 6.1007.000 Transition metals IC cation column 170 Metrosep C 5 - 150/4.6 6.4000.320 Transition metals, U, and Pu see footnote on next page E) Cations with chemical suppression 18 Requirements or application Column Page Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH + IC cation columns 194 4 Lipophilic amines with short retention times Metrosep C Supp 1 - 100/4.0 Rapid separations 6.1052.410 Trace analysis Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH + IC cation columns 4 Transition metals Metrosep C Supp 1 - 150/4.0 196 Amines 6.1052.420 √ Trace analysis Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH +, Mn2+, IC cation columns 198 4 Co2+, Ni2+, Zn2+, Cd2+, Pb2+, amines Metrosep C Supp 1 - 250/4.0 NH +, ethanolamines 6.1052.430 4 Na+/NH + separation 4 NH +, methylamines, and ethylamines 4 Transition metals Difficult separation problems Great differences in concentration Trace analysis Transition metals IC cation column 170 Metrosep C 5 - 150/4.6 6.4000.320 Transition metals, U, and Pu * F) Organic acids Requirements or application Column Page Organic acids: Citrate, tartrate, malate, ascorbate, IC exclusion columns succinate, etc. Metrosep Organic Acids Short-chain fatty acids: Formate, acetate, propionate, 6.1005.210 (100/7.8) 124 butyrate, etc. 6.1005.200 (250/7.8) 126 Simple matrices (100 mm) √ Difficult matrices (250 mm) Simple separation problems (100 mm) Difficult separation problems (250 mm) Glycolic acid, monochloroacetic acid IC exclusion column Simple matrices Hamilton PRP-X300 - 250/4.0 Simple separation problems 6.1005.030 122 Formate determination * Reliable determinations of transition metals as well as uranium and plutonium can be made into the ultra trace range using voltammetry and polarography. G) Carbohydrates Requirements or application Column Page 19 Monosaccharides IC carbohydrate column Disaccharides Metrosep Carb 2 - 100/x.0 Sugar alcohols 6.1090.410 (100/4.0) 130 Oligosaccharides 6.01090.210 (100/2.0) 142 Simple separation problems Very rapid separations Monosaccharides IC carbohydrate column √ Disaccharides Metrosep Carb 2 - 150/x.0 Sugar alcohols 6.1090.420 (150/4.0) 132 Anhydrosugars 6.01090.220 (150/2.0) 144 Oligosaccharides Rapid separations Monosaccharides IC carbohydrate column Disaccharides Metrosep Carb 2 - 250/x.0 Sugar alcohols 6.1090.430 (250/4.0) 134 Anhydrosugars 6.01090.230 (250/2.0) 146 Complex separations Monosaccharides IC carbohydrate column Disaccharides Hamilton RCX-30 - 150/4.6 Oligosaccharides 6.1018.010 136 Sugar alcohols Simple separation problems Rapid separation Monosaccharides IC carbohydrate column Disaccharides Hamilton RCX-30 - 250/4.6 Sugar alcohols 6.1018.000 138 Difficult separation problems Difficult matrices H) Amino acids Requirements or application Column Page Amino acids IC amino acid column Metrosep Amino Acids 1 - 100/4.0 6.4001.410 150 Capacity of the separation columns 20 The capacity of a separation column is determined by the The capacity specifications of a column manufacturer type of the stationary phase used. The capacity has no can be used to compare different columns of this manu-direct influence on selectivity, whereas the column mate-facturer. Capacity values from different manufacturers rial does. that apply different determination methods are not com-parable. In addition, the capacity of a separation column changes in proportion to the quantity of packaging material used. Which capacity is right? The following rules apply: This means that the capacity of a separation column also • Simple separation tasks, weakly ionic matrix increases as the column length and diameter increase.  Small capacity and therefore rapid separation of the analytes The capacity of separation columns can be determined • Complex separation tasks, strongly ionic matrix with a wide variety of methods, all of which can be justi-  High capacity and therefore long retention times fied scientifically. The capacities specified here have to do for the analytes with chloride or potassium exchange capacities, respectively, which are calculated by means of static charging. The practical solution is often to be found somewhere in The specifications of other manufacturers are based to between. Most separations can thus be solved with just some extent on proton exchange and neutralization a limited number of column types: methods. The latter results in disproportionately higher • Determination of anions: Metrosep A Supp 4 - numerical values. 250/4.0, Metrosep A Supp 5 - 150/4.0, Metrosep A Supp 16 - 150/4.0 • Determination of cations: Metrosep C 4 - 150/4.0 Capacities of the Metrohm anion columns A Supp 1 HS - 50/4.6 A Supp 10 - 75/2.0 A Supp 4 - 250/2.0 Anion Dual 3 - 100/4.0 Anion Dual 2 - 75/4.6 A Supp 5 - 250/2.0 A Supp 10 - 250/2.0 A Supp 16 - 150/2.0 A Supp 5 - 100/4.0 A Supp 17 - 100/4.0 A Supp 5 - 150/4.0 A Supp 17 - 150/4.0 A Supp 16 - 100/4.0 A Supp 10 - 250/4.0 A Supp 17 - 250/4.0 A Supp 16 - 150/4.0 A Supp 16 - 250/4.0 3 7 11 14 17 21 32 24 31 43 52 65 80 100 125 195 109 25 50 100 200 µmol Cl µmol Cl µmol Cl µmol Cl 5 9 12 15 17 18 21 22 27 32 35 37 51 85 62 74 76 94 120 110 0 0 -Sep - 100/4.6 -Ion A300 - 100/10 A Supp 10 - 50/2.0 A Supp 10 - 100/2.0 A Supp 1 - 250/4.6 A Supp 5 - 150/2.0 A Supp 10 - 150/2.0 A Supp 10 - 50/4.0 A Supp 5 - 50/4.0 A Supp 7 - 150/2. Star Ion A300 - 100/4.6 A Supp 10 - 75/4.0 A Supp 16 - 100/2.0 A Supp 7 - 250/2.0 Super A Supp 4 - 250/4. A Supp 10 - 100/4.0 A Supp 7 - 150/4.0 A Supp 5 - 250/4.0 A Supp 3 - 250/4.6 A Supp 16 - 250/2.0 PRP X100 - 125/4.0 Anion Dual 4 - 100/4.6 A Supp 7 - 250/4.0 PRP X100 - 250/4.0 Star Capacities of the Metrohm cation columns C 4 - 100/2.0 C 4 - 50/4.0 C 6 - 100/2.0 C 4 - 100/4.0 C 3 - 100/4.0 C 4 - 150/4.0 C 3 - 150/4.0 C 6 - 100/4.0 C 4 - 250/4.0 C 3 - 250/4.0 C 6 - 250/4.0 Nucleosil 5 SA - 150/4.6 3 5 10 12 15 18 20 25 30 50 95 10 20 30 µmol K µmol K µmol K 4 6 0 8 10 12 13 15 18 303 C 4 - 150/2.0 C 4 - 250/2.0 C 6 - 150/2.0 C 1 - 125/4.6 C 6 - 250/2.0 C 5 - 150/4.6 C 6 - 150/4.0 C Supp 1 - 100/4.0 C Supp 1 - 150/4.0 C Supp 1 - 250/4.0 Position of the system peak When work is performed with carbonate eluent, a sys- If the CO suppressor «MCS» is used, then the influence 2 21 tem peak is always present. Its size and position are of carbonate can be virtually excluded. Both system peak determined by various factors. The position of the system and injection peak are minimized and do not interfere peak, however, corresponds in the first approximation to with the integration. the retention time of carbonate. For this reason this peak is also called the system peak. To ensure that the measured values are not skewed, it is important to know the position of the system peak in the chromatogram. With columns based on polystyrene in particular the system peak often lies directly beneath the chloride peak. The position of the system peak with the respective standard carbo nate eluents is shown below. Position of the system peaks on Metrohm anion columns using the respective standard eluent. «MCS» Metrohm CO Suppressor 2 22 The «MCS» eliminates both carbonate from the sample and CO that develops during the suppression reaction. 2 As a result, the injection peak is practically nonexistent and the peak areas of the analyte ions are significantly larger. In addition, the system peak is effectively eliminated. The MCS is based on the gas permeability of a fluoropolymer membrane. The special system setup with an integrated vacuum cell, a fluoropolymer membrane, and a CO adsorber cartridge is controlled by MagIC Net. 2 Chromatography the way it should always be • Extremely low background conductivity • Very small injection peak (1) • Larger peak areas • Lower detection limits (3) • Minimized carbonate influence (2) • No system peak (2) Chromatography with (red) and without sequential suppression (blue) A unique feature of Metrohm IC is the combination of chemical suppression with the «MSM» (Metrohm Suppressor Module) and CO -suppression using the 2 «MCS» (Metrohm CO Suppressor) for sequential sup- 2 pression. This technique achieves lowest background conductivities for anion and cation suppression. Flexibility in application thanks to free selection of the pH value Metrohm enables successful working with a large num- 23 ber of eluents. The correct choice of eluent has a decisive influence on the analytics. With Metrohm, there are no limitations and you can use vir tually the entire pH range to obtain an optimum separation. pH ranges of various eluents for anion chromatography Standards 24 The world of standards is also changing. Today it is the The following standards deal with the determination of result that matters when it comes to compliance with anions and cations in water using ion chromatography. standards. Which instrument was used to calculate the The analytical requirements of these standards can be result is of sec ondary importance. This was not always met with Metrohm IC systems. The separation columns the case. The fact that today you have a free choice of with which the standard can be fulfilled are indicated in analytical instruments is in part due to the commitment brackets. of Metrohm application chemists, who have demon- strated to stand ards committees that new methods can also produce the correct result and therefore meet requirements. EPA 300.1 Part A and Part B EPA 332.0 Determination of inorganic anions in drinking water by Determination of perchlorate in drinking water by ion ion chromatography. (Metrosep A Supp 7 - 250/4.0; chromatography with chemical suppression as well as 6.1006.630; see page 70) conductivity detection and ESI/MS detection. (Metrosep A Supp 5 - 100/4.0; 6.1006.510; see page 62) EPA 314.0 Determination of perchlorate in drinking water by ion DIN 38413-8 chromatography. (Metrosep Dual 4 - 100/4.6; Determination of the dissolved complexing agents nitri-6.1016.030; see page 44) lotriacetic acid (NTA), ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA), and diethylenetriaminepentaacetic acid (DTPA) by EPA 218.7 liquid chromatography (LC). (2 x MetroSil RP 3 - 150/4.0; Determination of dissolved hexavalent chromium by 6.01070.420; see page 202) means of ion chromatography (post-column reaction and VIS detection). (Metrosep A Supp 5 - 150/4.0; 6.1006.520; DIN EN ISO 14911 see page 64) Water quality – Determination of dissolved lithium, sodium, ammonium, potassium, manganese(II), calcium, EPA 317.0 magnesium, strontium, and barium using ion chromato- Determination of inorganic oxyhalide disinfection by- graphy – Method for water and wastewater. (Metrosep products in drinking water using ion chromatography. C 4 - 150/4.0; 6.1050.420; see page 166) Trace analysis of bromate by means of post-column reaction – «o-dianisidine method». (Metrosep A Supp 5 - DIN EN 13368-1 250/4.0; 6.1006.530; see page 66) Determination of chelating agents in fertilizers by ion chromatography, Part 1: HEDTA, EDTA, DTPA. (Metrosep EPA 326, DIN EN ISO 11206 A Supp 3 - 250/4.6; 6.1005.320; see page 58) Determination of inorganic oxidation by-products in drinking water using ion chromatography. Trace analysis DIN 38405-7 of bromate by means of post-column reaction and UV Determination of cyanides in slightly polluted water by detection – «triiodide» method. Improved method with-ion chromatography or potentiometric titration (Metrosep out acidification using a suppressor. (Metrosep A Supp 10 - 100/2.0; 6.1020.210; see page 108) A Supp 16 - 100/4.0; 6.1031.410; see page 80) 25 DIN EN ISO 10304-1 Water quality – Determination of the dissolved anions fluoride, chloride, nitrite, orthophosphate, bromide, nitrate, and sulfate by liquid chromatography – Part 1: Method for slightly polluted wastewater. (Metrosep A Supp 17 - 250/4.0; 6.01032.430; Metrosep A Supp 16 - 150/4.0; 6.1031.420 or Metrosep A Supp 5 - 250/4.0; 6.1006.530) DIN EN ISO 10304-3 Water quality – determination of dissolved anions by liquid chromatography (LC) – Part 3: Determination of chromate, iodide, sulfite, thiocyanate, and thiososulfate in wastewater. (Metrosep A Supp 17 - 150/4.0; 6.01032.420 or Metrosep A Supp 5 - 150/4.0; 6.1006.520) DIN EN ISO 10304-4 Water quality – Determination of dissolved anions by liquid chromatography (LC) – Part 4: Determination of chlorate, chloride, and chlorite in slightly polluted wastewater. (Metrosep Anion Dual 2 - 75/4.6; 6.1006.100 or Metrosep A Supp 5 - 250; 6.1006.530) DIN EN ISO 15061 Determination of dissolved bromate in water. (Metrosep A Supp 5 - 250/4.0; 6.1006.530 or Metrosep A Supp 7 - 250/4.0; 6.1006.630) ABCs of practical work 26 Bacterial growth Eluent bottles Bacterial growth has a significant negative effect on Eluents are positioned in special eluent bottles, usually chromatography and destroys the analytical columns. A directly on the IC system. To prevent moisture and car-large number of chromatographic problems can be bon dioxide from being absorbed by the eluent, the traced back to the growth of algae, bacteria, and molds. bottles are equipped with a drying tube which normally In order to prevent bacterial growth, eluents, rinsing, and has a molecular sieve and is filled with soda lime (as a regeneration solutions should always be prepared fresh weak CO adsorber material) for sodium hydroxide and 2 and not reused after prolonged periods. We recommend carbonate eluents. that all vessels be thoroughly rinsed with ultrapure and UV-treated water and then rinsed with methanol/water Environmental protection or acetone/water and finally again with water before A great advantage of ion chromatography is that most being refilled. If bacteria or algae should form despite this work is carried out with aqueous media. The chemicals treatment, then 5% methanol or acetone can be added used in ion chromatography are therefore as non-toxic as to the eluent. This is not possible when using membrane possible and do not pollute the environment. Never the-suppressors, because these could be destroyed by organ-less, when work is carried out with acids, bases, organic ic solvents. The «MSM», «MSM-HC», and «MSM-LC» solvents, or heavy metal standards, they must be disposed Metrohm Suppressor Modules are 100% solvent-resis-of properly after use. tant. Methanol should not be used with some cation columns. Filter If problems occur with IC systems, they are usually due to Cation analyses particles introduced by bacterial growth, unfiltered elu-For all analyses we recommend that the samples be ents, by the sample or by rinsing and regeneration solu-acidified with nitric acid (approximately 100 µL 2 mol/L tions. This risk can be reduced to an absolute minimum HNO per 100 mL of sample) (pH 2.5 - 3.5), otherwise by using an aspiration filter (6.2821.090), inline filter 3 divalent cation results may be overestimated depending (6.2821.120), and guard columns (starting on page 204). on the age of the injection loop. The filters are part of the basic equipment of the Metrohm ion chromatographs and are included in the Chemical stress scope of delivery. We strongly recommend their use. Care Although many separation phases cover a wide pH range should be taken to ensure that the filters are replaced in terms of specification, this does not mean that they regularly. are chemically inert. Separation columns achieve their longest service life under constant chemical conditions. A Filtration of the eluent column must never be allowed to dry out and must All eluents should be microfiltered (0.45 µm) immedi-always be kept well-sealed. ately before being used. CO Fun 2 Carbon dioxide from air affect alkaline eluents. To avoid Ion chromatography should be fun and not get on your this, the eluent bottle should always be furnished with nerves. Metrohm does everything it can to ensure that a CO adsorber material («soda lime»). Eluents with a your IC systems work reliably with a minimum of upkeep, 2 weak buffer capacity must also be protected against CO . maintenance, and cost. Metrosep separation columns 2 stand for quality, long lifetime, and outstanding results. Degassing the eluent In order to prevent bubble formation, we recommended Guard columns (precolumns) to use the Eluent Degasser in the IC instrument. Guard columns (starting on page 200) are used to pro-Alternatively this is done by applying a vacuum created tect the valuable separation columns. We strongly rec-by a water-jet pump or vacuum pump for approximately ommend their use. As a rule they contain the same sta-10 minutes or by means of an ultrasonic bath. tionary phase as the separation column, although in a considerably smaller quantity to avoid influencing the Regeneration of separation columns 27 chromatography. Guard columns eliminate critical con- As a rule, if separation columns are operated with clean taminations which might react with the column material eluents and charged with particle-free samples, then a and they effectively eliminate particles and bacterial very long lifetime is guaranteed. A regeneration of the contamination. Guard columns need to be replaced if column is then not necessary and is also no longer pos- • the backpressure in the system rises sible after a large number of injections. Nevertheless, if • the chromatograohy gets worse the pressure in the column should rise unexpectedly or It is recommended to use 3...4 guard columns during the the separating efficiency decrease, then the regeneration lifetime of an analytical column. Guard columns are avail-steps which are indicated for each separation column able for all Metrosep separation columns. can be carried out. In general, it must be noted that the regeneration takes place outside the analytical line. This Long-term storage of the ion chromatograph means that the separation column is connected directly If the ion chromatograph will not be used for a proto the pump and the regeneration solution feeds longed period (>1 week), then the separation column through the column directly into the waste vessel. Before should be removed and sealed with the stoppers pro-the separation column is reinstalled, it should be rinsed vided. The ion chromatograph should be rinsed with sufficiently – for 30 minutes at standard flow – with fresh methanol/water (1:4). Care should be taken to ensure eluent. that all three chambers of the suppressor are rinsed during this process. The separation column should be stored Sample-preparation cartridges in the medium listed on the column data sheet, opti-Sample-preparation cartridges are used for the prepara-mally between 4 and 8 °C. When the instrument is tion of critical samples which cannot be injected directly re started, rinse the system with fresh eluent before on the separation columns. Thus, for example, sample-installing the separation column and bring it up to room preparation cartridges remove organic contamination or temperature. neutralize strongly alkaline or acidic samples. Sample-preparation cartridges are consumable materials which, Particles as a rule, cannot be regenerated. They do not replace the All solutions, samples, regeneration solutions, the water guard column (precolumn), which should always be used and the eluents should be free of particles because they with each separation column. «MISP» (Metrohm Inline may clog the separation columns over time (increase in Sample Preparation) offers an alternative to sample column pressure). This must be taken into account par-cart ridges, e.g. for the fully automated neutralization of ticularly when eluents are being produced, because elu-alkaline samples. ents flow continuously through the column (500...1000 mL per working day in contrast to approximately 0.5 mL Water quality of sample solution). The sample can be filtered or dia-Ion chromatography primarily involves work in aqueous lyzed fully automatically with the «MISP» Metrohm Inline media. Water quality is therefore of decisive importance Sample Preparation systems. for obtaining good chromatographic results. If the water quality is unsatisfactory, then the results will certainly be Pulsation absorber unsatisfactory as well. In addition, there is the risk of da - We recommend the use of a pulsation absorber maging instruments and separation columns due to (6.2620.150). In particular, polymethacrylate and polyvi-insufficient water quality. The ultrapure water used nyl alcohol columns should be protected against brief should have a specific resistance greater than 18 MΩ cm pressure surges which inevitably occur when the valves and be particle-free. It is therefore recommended that are switched. This protection is ensured when a pulsation the water be filtered through a 0.45 µm filter and treated absorber is used. with UV. Modern ultrapure water plants for laboratory use guarantee this water quality (Type I). Quality of chemicals All chemicals should be at least of p.a. or puriss. quality. The standards must be specially suited to ion chromatography. Tips for eluent preparation 28 Please note that the eluents must be degassed once in The exact concentration specifications of the recom-order to avoid bubble formation during the measure- mended standard eluents are listed in the chapter «Sepa-ments. Degassing can be carried out fully automatically ration columns», starting on page 30. by the eluent degasser in the IC instrument. Alternatively, the ultrapure water used can already be degassed before the reagents are added. Excellent water quality (high resistance, absence of particles, and bac teria) is crucial for good ion chromatography (see also the chapter «ABCs of practical work», starting on page 26). Inline Eluent Preparation tion times. After more than 800 sample injections, the 29 Inline Eluent Preparation means that eluent is refilled fully relative standard deviations for a series of anions and automatically while the ion chromatograph is in opera-cations were less than 0.55 and 0.41 percent, respecti-tion. An eluent concentrate is diluted in portions with vely. During a test sequence over a 24-hour period, the ultra pure water for the purpose of producing the precision of the retention times for anions and cations required eluent. were better than 0.09 and 0.08 percent, respectively. In short, this increases the reproducibility of retention times, For automatic Inline Eluent Preparation, the 940 thus permitting the exact analysis of anions and cations Professional IC Vario or 930 Compact IC Flex need only over extended periods, and does so without manual eluent be expanded to include an 941 Eluent Production production. Module. Tests with repeated injections of 250 µg/L standard solutions over a time period of approximately 20 days have demonstrated outstanding stability with respect to reten-Superimposition of 200 sequential cation chromatograms (250 µg/L of the standard cation) 30 Separation columns 31 IC anion-separation columns for analyses without chemical suppression Hamilton PRP-X100 - 125/4.0 (6.1005.000) 32 The Hamilton PRP-X100 - 125/4.0 IC anion column is a Applications robust separation column based on a polystyrene/divinyl- • Cl–, NO –, SO 2– 3 4 benzene copolymer. It is especially suited for the separa- • Difficult matrices, e.g. dyes tion of chloride, nitrate, and sulfate without chemical • HBO 2–, H SiO 2– 3 2 4 suppression. Fluoride can also be determined if the Technical information ca tions are first removed with an H+ cartridge. The Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene Hamilton PRP-X100 - 125/4.0 is also the separation copolymer with quaternary column of choice for the determination of silicate. The ammonium groups column is characterized by a very good price-perfor- Column dimensions 125 x 4.0 mm mance ratio. Column body Stainless steel Standard flow 2.0 mL/min Maximum flow 8.0 mL/min Maximum pressure 34 MPa Particle size 10 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 1...13 (T > 30 °C: 1...8) Capacity 62 µmol (Cl–) Eluents Phthalic acid eluent Phthalic acid 665 mg/2 L 2.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Acetone 152 mL/2 L or 7.6% or 10% 200 mL/2 L NaOH pH = 5 Silicate eluent Sodium hydroxide (c = 10 mol/L) 0.64 mL/2 L 3.2 mmol/L Sodium carbonate 106 mg/2 L 0.5 mmol/L Care Regeneration Storage Rinse the column with 0.5 mol/L tartaric acid or with For short periods (days) in the eluent, for longer periods 60 mmol/L HNO in methanol at a flow rate of (weeks) in methanol/water (1:4) 3 0.5 mL/min for 2 h. In case of contamination with iron: Rinse the column overnight with 0.1 mmol/L Na H EDTA 2 2 at a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min. 33 Chromatograms Phthalic acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 5.00 4 Bromide 10.00 2 Chloride 5.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 3 Nitrite 5.00 6 Sulfate 10.00 Phthalic acid eluent, drinking water sample Conc. (mg/L) Silicate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 0.04 3 Nitrate 10.13 1 Silicate 5.00 2 Chloride 6.15 4 Sulfate 7.36 Ordering information Hamilton PRP-X100 - 125/4.0 6.1005.000 Guard column cartridge for Hamilton PRP-X100 6.1005.020 Guard cartridge holder, 20 mm 6.02821.000 Hamilton PRP-X100 - 250/4.0 (6.1005.010) 34 The Hamilton PRP-X100 - 250/4.0 IC anion column is a Applications robust separation column based on a polystyrene/divinyl-Conductivity detection benzene copolymer. It is mainly used with difficult matri- • Cl–, NO –, SO 2– 3 4 ces, e.g. dyes. • Difficult matrices, e.g. dyes Technical information Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 250 x 4.0 mm Column body Stainless steel Standard flow 2.0 mL/min Maximum flow 8.0 mL/min Maximum pressure 34 MPa Particle size 10 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 1...13 (T > 30 °C: 1...8) Capacity 120 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Phthalic acid eluent Phthalic acid 665 mg/2 L 2.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Acetone 152 mL/2 L or 7.6% or 10% 200 mL/2 L NaOH pH = 5 Care Regeneration Storage Rinse the column with 0.5 mol/L tartaric acid or with For short periods (days) in the eluent, for longer periods 60 mmol/L HNO in methanol at a flow rate of (weeks) in methanol/water (1:4) 3 0.5 mL/min for 2 h. In case of contamination with iron: Rinse the column overnight with 0.1 mmol/L Na H EDTA 2 2 at a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min. 35 Ordering information Hamilton PRP-X100 - 250/4.0 6.1005.010 Guard column cartridge for Hamilton PRP-X100 6.1005.020 Guard cartridge holder, 20 mm 6.02821.000 Super-Sep - 100/4.6 (6.1009.000) 36 In addition to the analysis of standard anions without Applications chemical suppression, this column can be used for a Conductivity detection variety of special applications. The Super-Sep - 100/4.6 IC • F–, acetate anion column can be used for successful phosphate • Difficult matrices detection with alkaline eluent. Formate, acetate, and • Special applications, e.g. BF –4 fluoride can be separated with suitable eluents. Overall, Amperometric detection it is a column with very good separation performance. • ClO –, NO –, S O 2–, SCN–, I– 2 2 2 3 Technical information Substrate Polymethacrylate Column dimensions 100 x 4.6 mm Column body Stainless steel Standard flow 1.5 mL/min Maximum flow 2.0 mL/min Maximum pressure 2.5 MPa Particle size 12 µm Organic modifier 0...20% pH range 1...13 Temperature range 20...50 °C Capacity 32 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Phthalic acid eluent Phthalic acid 831 mg/2 L 2.5 mmol/L (standard eluent) Acetonitrile 100 mL/2 L 5.0% TRIS pH = 4.0 Care Regeneration Storage Rinse the column with 20% acetonitrile in 0.1 mol/L nitric In the eluent acid; flow rate 0.3 mL/min for approx. 24 h. If insufficient: • Metal contaminants: 0.1 mol/L sodium tartrate • Protein contaminants: 0.1 mol/L sodium hydroxide or 20% acetic acid • Organic contaminants: 20% acetonitrile in ultrapure water 37 Chromatograms Phthalic acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Phthalic acid eluent, drinking water sample Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 5.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 1 Fluoride 0.03 4 Sulfate 5.35 2 Chloride 5.00 6 Sulfate 10.00 2 Chloride 6.43 5 System peak – 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 System peak – 3 Nitrate 7.83 4 Bromide 10.00 Ordering information Super-Sep - 100/4.6 6.1009.000 Super-Sep Guard/4.6 (no holder required) 6.1009.010 38 Separation columns 39 IC anion-separation columns for analyses with or without chemical suppression Metrosep Anion Dual 2 - 75/4.6 (6.1006.100) 40 The Metrosep Anion Dual 2 - 75/4.6 column is based on Applications an acrylate polymer. Without chemical suppression, it Conductivity detection without chemical suppression can be used with conventional phthalic acid eluents and • Difficult separation problems a range of other eluent systems. The benefits of working • Difficult matrices without chemical suppression (simple analytical method • F– and linear calibration) can thus be taken advantage of. Conductivity detection with chemical suppression • Standard anions When used with chemical suppression, the column excels • F–, formate, acetate, Cl–, SO 2–, SO 2– 3 4 in its outstanding separating efficiency, particularly with • Simple matrices respect to early eluting ions (fluoride, acetate, formate). • ClO –, ClO –, ClO –, BrO – 2 3 4 3 The separation between fluoride and the «water dip» as • Special separation problems well as between chloride and nitrite is remarkable. Amperometric detection • Br–, I– In order to prolong the lifetime of the column even further, we recommend the use of the Metrosep RP 2 Technical information Guard/3.5 (6.1011.030). Substrate Polymethacrylate with qua- ternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 75 x 4.6 mm Column body Stainless steel Standard flow 0.8 mL/min Maximum flow 1.2 mL/min Maximum pressure 7 MPa Particle size 6 µm Organic modifier 0...20% pH range 1...12 Capacity 17 µmol (Cl–) Eluents Without chemical suppression Phthalic acid eluent Phthalic acid 1660 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Acetonitrile 40 mL/2 L 2% NaOH pH = 4.5 With chemical suppression Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 336 mg/2 L 2.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 276 mg/2 L 1.3 mmol/L Care Transition metals: Regeneration When using carbonate eluent: Add 0.1 mmol/L dipico- Rinse with 0.1 mol/L HNO at 0.3 mL/min for approx. linic acid to the standard carbonate eluent; rinse in the 3 2 h, then switch to standard eluent. opposite flow direction with this eluent for 3 hours at 0.5 mL/min; then rinse the column again under standard Rinse with an eluent containing 100 mmol/L of the conditions in the flow direction for at least 2 hours. respective buffer salt. Storage Organic contaminants: In the eluent Rinse the column with eluent containing organic solvent (max. 20%). Chromatograms 41 Phthalic acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 5.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 2 Chloride 5.00 6 Sulfate 10.00 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 System peak – 4 Bromide 10.00 Phthalic acid eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Chloride 5.23 3 Sulfate 6.94 1 Fluoride 5.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 2 Nitrate 10.32 4 System peak – 2 Chloride 5.00 6 Phosphate 10.00 3 Nitrite 10.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 4 Bromide 10.00 Carbonate eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 0.05 4 Nitrate 10.06 1 Chlorite, ClO – 40.00 3 Chlorate, ClO – 2.00 2 3 2 Chloride 4.73 5 Sulfate 6.20 2 Chloride, Cl– 4.00 4 Perchlorate, ClO – 1.00 4 3 System peak – Ordering information Metrosep Anion Dual 2 - 75/4.6 6.1006.100 Metrosep RP 2 Guard/3.5 6.1011.030 Replacement filters for RP 2 Guard/3.5 (10 pcs.) 6.1011.130 Metrosep RP 3 Guard HC/4.0 6.1011.040 Metrosep Anion Dual 3 - 100/4.0 (6.1006.120) 42 The Metrosep Anion Dual 3 - 100/4.0 made of PEEK is Applications particularly suitable for biological samples. It can be used Conductivity detection without chemical suppression to solve separation problems both with and without • Difficult separation problems chemical suppression. Its performance profile is identical • Difficult matrices to that of the Metrosep Anion Dual 2 - 75/4.6. This • F– means that early eluting ions are separated very well and Conductivity detection with chemical suppression that oxohalides can be determined very efficiently. The • Standard anions Metrosep Anion Dual 3 - 100/4.0 can also be used for • F–, formate, acetate ,Cl–, SO 2–, SO 2– 3 4 samples with high chloride but low nitrite contents. • Simple matrices • ClO –, ClO –, ClO –, BrO – 2 3 4 3 When working with amperometric detection, the • Special separation problems Metrosep Anion Dual 3 - 100/4.0 can be used for the Amperometric detection determination of bromide and iodide. • Br–, I– In order to prolong the lifetime of the column, we Technical information recommend the use of the Metrosep RP 2 Guard/3.5 Substrate Polymethacrylate with qua- (6.1011.030). ternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 100 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.8 mL/min Maximum flow 1.2 mL/min Maximum pressure 7 MPa Particle size 6 µm Organic modifier 0...20% pH range 1...12 Capacity 14 µmol (Cl–) Eluents Without chemical suppression Phthalic acid eluent Phthalic acid 1660 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Acetonitrile 40 mL/2 L 2% NaOH pH = 4.5 With chemical suppression Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 336 mg/2 L 2.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 276 mg/2 L 1.3 mmol/L Care Transition metals: Regeneration When using carbonate eluent: Add 0.1 mmol/L dipico- Rinse with 0.1 mol/L HNO at 0.3 mL/min for approx. linic acid to the standard carbonate eluent; rinse in the 3 2 h, then switch to standard eluent. opposite flow direction with this eluent for 3 hours at 0.5 mL/min; then rinse the column again under standard Rinse with an eluent containing 100 mmol/L of the conditions in the flow direction for at least 2 hours. respective buffer salt. Storage Organic contaminants: In the eluent Rinse the column with eluent containing organic solvent (max. 20%). 43 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 5.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 1 Fluoride 0.05 4 Nitrate 10.06 2 Chloride 5.00 6 Phosphate 10.00 2 Chloride 4.73 5 Sulfate 6.20 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 3 System peak – 4 Bromide 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep Anion Dual 3 - 100/4.0 6.1006.120 Metrosep RP 2 Guard/3.5 6.1011.030 Replacement filters for RP 2 Guard/3.5 (10 pcs.) 6.1011.130 Metrosep RP 3 Guard HC/4.0 6.1011.040 Metrosep Dual 4 - 100/4.6 (6.1016.030) 44 The Metrosep Dual 4 separation columns are based on a Applications functionalized Monolith based on silica gel. The Monolith • Rapid separations permits an eluent flow of up to 5 mL/min. Despite the • Complex sample matrices high flow, the column is characterized by low backpres- • EPA 314 sure. In contrast to traditional materials, the Monolith • Detection of perchlorate has a much larger surface due to its structure of macropores and mesopores. This contributes to the high col-Technical information umn capacity with simultaneously very low dead volume. Substrate Monolithic silica gel Column dimensions 100 x 4.6 mm The Metrosep Dual 4 - 100/4.6 is suitable for a great Column body PEEK number of applications. All standard anions can thus be Standard flow 2.0 mL/min separated in less than nine minutes. The high column Maximum flow 5.0 mL/min capacity makes it largely insensitive to matrix influences. Maximum pressure 20 MPa Even in a matrix of 3 g/L chloride, carbonate and sulfate, Particle size Monolith with 2 µm macro- 0.5 µg/L perchlorate can be detected. The column is pores and 13 nm mesopores therefore used in perchlorate analysis in accordance with Organic modifier 0...5% (methanol or EPA standard 314. acetonitrile only) pH range 2...8 The column can be used with or without chemical sup- Capacity 74 µmol (Cl–) pression. When p-cyanophenol is used as the eluent, it is recommended that the Metrosep RP Trap 1 - 50/4.0 (6.1014.100) be installed between pulsation absorber and injection valve. Eluent p-cyanophenol eluent p-cyanophenol 2859 mg/2 L 12.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) KOH pH = 7.4 ± 0.1 Care Preparation Storage Rinse the column with eluent for 0.5...1 h. In the eluent Regeneration Rinse the column with a maximum of 5% acetonitrile at a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min for 30 min. 45 Chromatograms p-cyanophenol eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 2.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 2 Chloride 2.00 6 Phosphate 10.00 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 4 Bromide 10.00 p-cyanophenol eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) p-cyanophenol eluent, Standard, EPA 314 Conc. (µg/L) 1 Chloride 5.25 3 Sulfate 6.90 - Chloride 1,000,000 1 Perchlorate 0.54 2 Nitrate 10.36 - Carbonate 1,000,000 - Sulfate 1,000,000 Flow rate 1.75 mL/min Sample volume 750 µL Ordering information Metrosep Dual 4 - 100/4.6 6.1016.030 Guard column kit for the Metrosep Dual 4, comprised of three guard column cartridges and one guard column cartridge holder 6.1016.500 Guard column cartridges for the Metrosep Dual 4 (3 pcs.) 6.1016.510 Metrosep A Supp 4 - 250/4.0 (6.1006.430) 46 The Metrosep A Supp 4 - 250/4.0 is an extremely robust Applications column with very good separation properties. The separa- • Standard anions tion phase is comprised of polyvinyl alcohol particles with • Water analysis quaternary ammonium groups and a diameter of 9 µm. • Difficult matrices This structure guarantees great stability and a greater toler- • Critical samples ance to very small particles which could pass through the • Iodide integrated filter plate. The Metrosep A Supp 4 - 250/4.0 has a medium ion-exchange capacity; sulfate elutes after Technical information 12.5 minutes. The number of plates which can be achieved Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with with this separation column is higher than those on the quaternary Metrosep Anion Dual 2 - 75/4.6. The A Supp 4 - 250/4.0 ammonium groups is particularly suitable for all routine tasks in water analysis. Column dimensions 250 x 4.0 mm Its universal applicability makes it the standard column for Column body PEEK the 883 Basic IC plus. Standard flow 1.0 mL/min Maximum flow 2.0 mL/min To protect the IC separation column – even though it is not Maximum pressure 12 MPa particularly sensitive to contaminants – we recommend the Particle size 9 µm use of the Metrosep A Supp 4 Guard/4.0 or the A Supp 4 Organic modifier 0...100% (particularly S-Guard/4.0. acetone, acetonitrile, methanol) pH range 3...12 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 37 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Without chemical suppression Phthalic acid eluent Phthalic acid 1660 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Acetone 40 mL/2 L 2.0% TRIS pH = 4.4 With chemical suppression Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 286 mg/2 L 1.7 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 382 mg/2 L 1.8 mmol/L Carbonate eluent, mod. Sodium hydrogen carbonate 672 mg/2 L 4.0 mmol/L Sodium carbonate 212 mg/2 L 1.0 mmol/L Care Contamination with lipophilic ions: Regeneration a) Rinse with ultrapure water (15 min at 0.5 mL/min) Contamination with hydrophilic ions: b) Rinse with 5% acetonitrile (10 min at 0.5 mL/min) a) Rinse with ultrapure water (15 min at 0.5 mL/min) c) Rinse with 100% acetonitrile (60 min at 0.5 mL/min) b) Rinse with 10x concentrated eluent d) Rinse with 50% acetonitrile (10 min at 0.5 mL/min) (60 min at 0.5 mL/min) e) Rinse with ultrapure water (30 min at 0.5 mL/min) c) Rinse with ultrapure water (15 min at 0.5 mL/min) f) Rinse with eluent (60 min at 0.5 mL/min) d) Rinse with eluent (60 min at 0.5 mL/min) Storage In the eluent 47 Chromatograms Phthalic acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Chloride 25.0 4 Nitrate 25.0 1 Fluoride 5.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 2 Nitrite 25.0 5 Sulfate 25.0 2 Chloride 5.00 6 Phosphate 10.00 3 Bromide 25.0 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 4 Bromide 10.00 Carbonate eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, mod., mineral water Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 0.04 4 System peak – 1 Fluoride 0.685 5 Nitrate 0.267 2 Chloride 5.25 5 Sulfate 6.90 2 Chloride 17.43 6 Sulfate 121.0 3 Nitrate 10.36 3 Nitrite 0.037 7 Iodide 0.034 4 Bromide 0.181 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 4 - 250/4.0 6.1006.430 Metrosep A Supp 4 Guard/4.0 6.01021.500 Metrosep A Supp 4 S-Guard/4.0 6.01021.510 48 Separation columns 49 IC anion-separation columns for analyses with chemical suppression Phenomenex Star-Ion A300TM - 100/4.6 (6.1005.100) 50 The Star-Ion A300TM - 100/4.6 IC anion column's separa-Applications tion properties are based on the use of styrene-divinyl- • Rapid separation of standard anions benzene resin. The separation between the «water dip» • Fluoride in addition to an excess of lactate and chloride is not as sharp as with acrylate-based and • Chromate vinyl alcohol-based columns. The Star-Ion A300TM - 100/4.6 features lower separation efficiency in the fluo-Technical information ride range. This column nevertheless excels in its extreme-Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene ly short analysis times. copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups Standard anions can be determined in less than 8 Column dimensions 100 x 4.6 mm mi nutes. Moreover, this column can be used to deter- Column body PEEK mine fluoride in the ppm range in the presence of very Standard flow 1.5 mL/min large amounts of lactate (Application Note S-37). Maximum flow 2.0 mL/min Maximum pressure 7 MPa The system peak and high carbonate concentrations Particle size 7 µm interfere with the integration of the chloride peak. It is Organic modifier 0% therefore recommended that the «MCS» (Metrohm CO pH range 1...12 2 Suppressor) be used. Capacity 21 µmol (Cl–) Eluents Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 286 mg/2 L 1.7 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 382 mg/2 L 1.8 mmol/L Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 841 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L (modified) Sodium carbonate 743 mg/2 L 3.5 mmol/L Care Regeneration Storage Rinse for 30 min at 1.0 mL/min with a solution con- In the eluent taining 18 mmol/L Na CO (1908 mg) and 17 mmol/L 2 3 NaHCO (1428 mg). 3 51 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, modified, dye, 1 Fluoride 0.20 5 Nitrate 1.00 Dil. 1:100 Conc. (mg/L) 2 Chloride 0.50 6 Phosphate 1.00 1 Chromate (VI) 3.24 3 Nitrite 0.50 7 Sulfate 1.00 4 Bromide 1.00 Ordering information Phenomenex Star-Ion A300™ - 100/4.6 6.1005.100 Metrosep RP 2 Guard/3.5 6.1011.030 Replacement filters for RP 2 Guard/3.5 (10 pcs.) 6.1011.130 Metrosep RP 3 Guard HC/4.0 6.1011.040 Phenomenex Star-Ion A300TM HC - 100/10.0 (6.1005.110) 52 The high-capacity version of the Star-Ion A300™ IC Applications anion column is particularly suitable for the direct deter- • Standard anions mination of bromate in the µg/L range. With post-col- • BrO – for samples with high ionic strength 3 umn reaction and UV detection, bromate can be deter- mined with certainty, even in the ng/L range in accor-Technical information dance with EPA 326 or DIN EN ISO 11206, respectively. Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene copolymer with quaternary Thanks to its high capacity, sample preparation can fre-ammonium groups quently be eliminated. Using the standard carbonate Column dimensions 100 x 10.0 mm eluent chloride elutes before bromate on the Phenomenex Column body PEEK (steel jacket) Star-Ion A300™ HC - 100/10.0. The system peak and Standard flow 3.0 mL/min high carbonate concentrations interfere with the integra-Maximum flow 5.0 mL/min tion of the chloride peak. It is therefore recommended Maximum pressure 7 MPa that the «MCS» (Metrohm CO Suppressor) be used. Particle size 7 µm 2 Organic modifier 0% pH range 1...12 Capacity 94 µmol (Cl–) Eluents Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 286 mg/2 L 1.7 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 382 mg/2 L 1.8 mmol/L Bromate eluent Sulfuric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 200 mL/2 L 100 mmol/L Ammonium heptamolybdate 19.3 mL/2 L 19.3 µmol/L (NH ) Mo O · 4 H O 4 6 7 24 2 (c = 2.0 mmol/L) Care Regeneration Storage Rinse for 30 min at 1.0 mL/min with a solution con- In the eluent taining 18 mmol/L Na CO (1908 mg) and 17 mmol/L 2 3 NaHCO (1428 mg). 3 53 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, mineral water. Bromate eluent, drinking water sample, UV detection Dil. 1:100, Ag+-, H+-cartridge Conc. (µg/L) ( = 352 nm), DIN EN ISO 11206 y Conc. (µg/L) 1 Nitrite n.q. 1 Bromate 0.128 2 Bromate 48.0 Ordering information Phenomenex Star-Ion A300™ HC - 100/10.0 6.1005.110 PEEK pressure screw (long) for the A300 HC 6.2744.090 Metrosep RP 2 Guard/3.5 6.1011.030 Replacement filters for RP 2 Guard/3.5 (10 pcs.) 6.1011.130 Metrosep RP 3 Guard HC/4.0 6.1011.040 Metrosep A Supp 1 - 250/4.6 (6.1005.300) 54 The Metrosep A Supp 1 - 250/4.6 is a universal anion Applications column which is characterized by medium capacity and Conductivity detection special selectivity. With this column it is possible to pro- • Great differences in concentration cess samples with great differences in concentration. For • High ionic strength example, 4 µg/L of sulfate can be determined in a solu- • ClO –, ClO –, ClO – 2 3 4 tion containing 150 g/L sodium chloride. An additional Amperometric detection advantage is that bromide elutes after nitrate. Particularly • CN– in the area of oxohalide analysis, the A Supp 1 - 250/4.6 • S2– excels in its outstanding separation properties. Pressure fluctuations, constantly changing eluents, and large Technical information sample through-put do not influence the sepa rating Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene efficiency of this column, even after very long periods. It copolymer with quaternary is the «workhorse» for development and routine labora-ammonium groups tories. Column dimensions 250 x 4.6 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 1.0 mL/min Maximum flow 2.5 mL/min Maximum pressure 15 MPa Particle size 7 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 1...13 Capacity 12 µmol (Cl–) Eluents Carbonate eluent Sodium carbonate 636 mg/2 L 3.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium hydroxide eluent Sodium hydroxide (c = 10 mol/L) 20 mL/2 L 100 mmol/L Care Regeneration Storage Rinse with 50 mL of a 0.05 mol/L solution of Na EDTA at In the eluent. For a longer period (weeks), store the 4 a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min. Then rinse with 0.1 mol/L column in a refrigerator at minimum +4 °C. NaOH at 0.5 mL/min for 1 h. Organic contaminants: Rinse with 70% methanol at 1.0 mL/min for 12 h. The addition of 1% acetic acid may be useful. 55 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Sodium hydroxide eluent, standard, 1 Fluoride 2.00 6 Chlorate 10.00 amperometric detection Conc. (µg/L) 2 Chlorite 5.00 7 Nitrate 10.00 1 Cyanide 4.0 3 Bromate 5.00 8 Bromide 10.00 4 Chloride 5.00 9 Phosphate 10.00 5 Nitrite 5.00 10 Sulfate 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 1 - 250/4.6 6.1005.300 Metrosep A Supp 1 Guard/4.6 6.1005.340 Metrosep A Supp 1 HS - 50/4.6 (6.1005.350) 56 The Metrosep A Supp 1 HS - 50/4.6 permits the separa- Applications tion of standard anions in a very short time. The • Cl–, PO 3–, SO 2– in cola beverages 4 4 Metrosep A Supp 1 HS - 50/4.6 is also the column of • Very rapid separation choice for the determination of only a few anions in an • Standard anions in uncomplicated sample matrices uncomplicated sample matrix. For example, the analysis of phosphate as well as chloride and sulfate in cola bev-Technical information erages can be carried out in less than three minutes. Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 50 x 4.6 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 1.3 mL/min Maximum flow 2.5 mL/min Maximum pressure 4.0 MPa Particle size 7 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 1...13 Capacity 3.1 µmol (Cl–) Eluents Carbonate eluent Sodium carbonate 636 mg/2 L 3.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Care Regeneration Storage Rinse with 15 mL of a 0.05 mol/L solution of Na EDTA at In the eluent. For a longer period (weeks), store the 4 a flow rate of 0.25 mL/min. Then rinse with 0.1 mol/L column in a refrigerator at minimum +4 °C. NaOH at 0.25 mL/min for 1 h. Organic contaminants: Rinse with 70% methanol at 0.4 mL/min for 12 h. The addition of 1% acetic acid may be useful. 57 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, cola beverage Conc. (mg/L) 1 Chloride 50.0 3 Phosphate 500.0 1 Chloride 5.0 3 Phosphate 496.3 2 Nitrate 20.0 4 Sulfate 50.0 2 Nitrate 8.2 4 Sulfate 10.4 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 1 HS - 50/4.6 6.1005.350 Metrosep RP 2 Guard/3.5 6.1011.030 Replacement filters for RP 2 Guard/3.5 (10 pcs.) 6.1011.130 Metrosep RP 3 Guard HC/4.0 6.1011.040 Metrosep A Supp 3 - 250/4.6 (6.1005.320) 58 The Metrosep A Supp 3 - 250/4.6 solves separation prob-Applications lems in aqueous and organic media. It can be used reli- • SCN–, SO 2–, SO 2–, S O 2– 3 4 2 3 ably with a wide range of eluents – even those with high • Polyphosphates proportions of organic solvents. With the Metrosep A • Organic matrices Supp 3 - 250/4.6, highly demanding samples can be analyzed in routine operation, for example the measure-Technical information ment of biological samples or the determination of inor-Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene ganic anions in organic matrices. Poly phosphates can be copolymer with quaternary separated effectively with the aid of a sodium hydroxide ammonium groups gradient on the Metrosep A Supp 3 - 250/4.6. In iso- Column dimensions 250 x 4.6 mm cratic operation, the column is also suitable for the sepa-Column body PEEK ration of sulfite, sulfate, and thiosulfate in less than Standard flow 1.0 mL/min 20 min. Maximum flow 1.5 mL/min Maximum pressure 15 MPa Particle size 9 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 1...13 Capacity 35 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 286 mg/2 L 1.7 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 382 mg/2 L 1.8 mmol/L Care Regeneration Storage Rinse with 50 mL of a 0.05 mol/L solution of Na EDTA at In the eluent. For a longer period (weeks), store the 4 a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min. Then rinse with 0.1 mol/L column in a refrigerator at minimum +4 °C. NaOH at 0.5 mL/min for 1 h. Organic contaminants: Rinse with 70% methanol at 1.0 mL/min for 12 h. The addition of 1% acetic acid may be useful. 59 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) 1 Injection peak – 5 Bromide 10.00 1 Injection peak – 4 System peak – 2 Fluoride 2.00 6 Nitrate 10.00 2 Fluoride 0.04 5 Nitrate 10.25 3 Chloride 5.00 7 Phosphate 10.00 3 Chloride 5.24 6 Sulfate 6.92 4 Nitrite 5.00 8 Sulfate 10.00 Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 1.25 6 Phosphate 5.00 2 Chloride 2.50 7 Sulfite 5.00 3 Nitrite 2.50 8 Sulfate 5.00 4 Bromide 5.00 9 Thiosulfate 5.00 5 Nitrate 5.00 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 3 - 250/4.6 6.1005.320 Metrosep RP 2 Guard/3.5 6.1011.030 Replacement filters for RP 2 Guard/3.5 (10 pcs.) 6.1011.130 Metrosep RP 3 Guard HC/4.0 6.1011.040 Metrosep A Supp 5 - 50/4.0 (6.1006.550) 60 The Metrosep A Supp 5 - 50/4.0 separates the seven Applications standard anions in less than six minutes. Even fluoride is • Rapid separation of standard anions still separated from the injection peak and can be inte- • Simple sample matrices grated perfectly. Like all columns in the A-Supp-5 product • Method development range, the column, which is based on a polyvinyl alcohol polymer, is characterized by high plate numbers and Technical information therefore by outstanding separating efficiency. The Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with qua-Metrosep A Supp 5 - 50/4.0 is the column of choice ternary ammonium groups when simple separation tasks must be solved in a short Column dimensions 50 x 4.0 mm time – and that without having to sacrifice very low Column body PEEK detection limits. Standard flow 0.7 mL/min Maximum flow 0.8 mL/min Maximum pressure 15 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier 0...100%, (particularly acetone, acetonitrile, methanol) pH range 3...12 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 18 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 168 mg/2 L 1.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 678 mg/2 L 3.2 mmol/L Perchlorate eluent Sodium carbonate 3.178 g/2 L 15.0 mmol/L Acetone 200 mL/2 L 10% Care Regeneration With shifted system peak (regeneration method with Contamination with hydrophilic ions: column oven): a) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) a) Rinse with concentrated eluent 1 mol/L Na CO 2 3 b) Rinse with 10x concentrated eluent (100 min at (25 min at 0.4 mL/min) 0.3 mL/min) b) Maintain for 10...12 h at 45...50 °C (without rinsing) c) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) c) Rinse with standard eluent (at least 40 min at d) Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.3 mL/min) 0.4 mL/min) Contamination with lipophilic ions: Storage a) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) In the eluent b) Rinse with 5% acetonitrile (20 min at 0.3 mL/min) c) Rinse with 100% acetonitrile (60 min at 0.3 mL/min) d) Rinse with 50% acetonitrile (10 min at 0.3 mL/min) e) Rinse with ultrapure water (50 min at 0.3 mL/min) f) Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.3 mL/min) 61 Chromatograms Perchlorate eluent, surface water Conc. (µg/L) 1 Perchlorate 13.4 Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 2.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 1 Fluoride 0.04 4 Nitrate 10.36 2 Chloride 5.00 6 Phosphate 10.00 2 Chloride 5.25 5 Sulfate 6.90 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 3 System peak – 4 Bromide 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 5 - 50/4.0 6.1006.550 Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/4.0 6.1006.500 Metrosep A Supp 5 S-Guard/4.0 6.1006.540 Metrosep A Supp 5 - 100/4.0 (6.1006.510) 62 The Metrosep A Supp 5 - 100/4.0 allows highly efficient, Applications rapid separations. This property makes the Metrosep A Conductivity detection Supp 5 - 100/4.0 the standard column for short analysis • Standard anions times and the determination of late eluting anions (e.g. • F–, Cl–, Br–, I–, ClO –, ClO –, ClO –, BrO – 2 3 4 3 perchlorate). • ClO – 4 • Cr(VI) (CrO 2–), I– 4 • Method development • Universal applications • Determination of phosphate in cola beverages • Rapid separation Amperometric detection • NO –, ClO – 2 2 • S O 2–, SCN–, I– 2 3 Technical information Maximum pressure 15 MPa Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with qua- Particle size 5 µm ternary ammonium groups Organic modifier 0...100%, (particularly Column dimensions 100 x 4.0 mm acetone, acetonitrile, Column body PEEK methanol) Standard flow 0.7 mL/min pH range 3...12 Maximum flow 0.8 mL/min Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 32 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 168 mg/2 L 1.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 678 mg/2 L 3.2 mmol/L Cola eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 504 mg/2 L 3.0 mmol/L Sodium carbonate 1484 mg/2 L 7.0 mmol/L Care Regeneration e) Rinse with ultrapure water (50 min at 0.3 mL/min) Contamination with hydrophilic ions: f) Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.3 mL/min) a) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) b) Rinse with 10x concentrated eluent (100 min at With shifted system peak (regeneration method with 0.3 mL/min) column oven): c) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) a) Rinse with concentrated eluent 1 mol/L Na CO 2 3 d) Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.3 mL/min) (25 min at 0.4 mL/min) b) Maintain for 10...12 h at 45...50 °C (without rinsing) Contamination with lipophilic ions: c) Rinse with standard eluent (at least 40 min at a) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) 0.4 mL/min) b) Rinse with 5% acetonitrile (20 min at 0.3 mL/min) c) Rinse with 100% acetonitrile (60 min at 0.3 mL/min) Storage d) Rinse with 50% acetonitrile (10 min at 0.3 mL/min) In the eluent 63 Chromatograms Cola eluent, cola beverage Conc. (mg/L) RSD retention time < 0.1% Number of analyses n = 400 1 Phosphate 532.53 2 Sulfate 36.63 RSD concentration < 0.2% Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 2.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 1 Fluoride 0.04 4 Nitrate 10.30 2 Chloride 5.00 6 Phosphate 10.00 2 Chloride 5.15 5 Sulfate 6.89 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 3 System peak – 4 Bromide 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 5 - 100/4.0 6.1006.510 Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/4.0 6.1006.500 Metrosep A Supp 5 S-Guard/4.0 6.1006.540 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard HC/4.0 6.1020.520 Metrosep A Supp 5 - 150/4.0 (6.1006.520) 64 The 150 mm version of the Metrosep A Supp 5 is char- Applications acterized by its very good separation properties. High • Standard anions plate numbers and excellent peak symmetries simplify • F–, Cl–, Br–, I– working in the lower µg/L range. The particle size of • ClO –, ClO –, ClO –, BrO – 2 3 4 3 5 µm makes a decisive contribution to the separating • Cr(VI) (CrO42–) efficiency of this column. The Metrosep A Supp 5 - • Method development 150/4.0 offers the optimum combination of selectivity • Difficult matrices and capacity, with which even complex separation tasks • Difficult separation problems can be solved within a short time. This characteristic makes the Metrosep A Supp 5 - 150/4.0 one of the best Technical information universally applicable standard IC columns. Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with qua- ternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 150 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.7 mL/min Maximum flow 0.8 mL/min Maximum pressure 15 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier 0...100% (particularly acetone, acetonitrile, methanol) pH range 3...12 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 52 µmol (Cl–) Eluents Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 168 mg/2 L 1.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 678 mg/2 L 3.2 mmol/L Chromate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 672 mg/2 L 4.0 mmol/L Sodium carbonate 2714 mg/2 L 12.8 mmol/L Care Regeneration e) Rinse with ultrapure water (50 min at 0.3 mL/min) Contamination with hydrophilic ions: f) Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.3 mL/min) a) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) b) Rinse with 10x concentrated eluent (100 min at With shifted system peak (regeneration method with 0.3 mL/min) column oven): c) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) a) Rinse with concentrated eluent 1 mol/L Na CO 2 3 d) Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.3 mL/min) (25 min at 0.4 mL/min) b) Maintain for 10...12 h at 45...50 °C (without rinsing) Contamination with lipophilic ions: c) Rinse with standard eluent (at least 40 min at a) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) 0.4 mL/min) b) Rinse with 5% acetonitrile (20 min at 0.3 mL/min) c) Rinse with 100% acetonitrile (60 min at 0.3 mL/min) Storage d) Rinse with 50% acetonitrile (10 min at 0.3 mL/min) In the eluent 65 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 2.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 2 Chloride 5.00 6 Phosphate 10.00 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 4 Bromide 10.00 Carbonate eluent, biomass with combustion IC Conc. (mg/kg) Chromate eluent, leather extract, 1 Fluoride 276 3 Bromide 14 VIS detection ( = 540 nm), dialysis y Conc. (µg/L) 2 Chloride 2326 4 Sulfate 2262 1 Chromate 19.0 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 5 - 150/4.0 6.1006.520 Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/4.0 6.1006.500 Metrosep A Supp 5 S-Guard/4.0 6.1006.540 Metrosep A Supp 5 - 250/4.0 (6.1006.530) 66 The high-performance separation column from Metrohm Applications with an extremely high number of plates for the most • Standard anions demanding separation tasks. Even complex separation • F–, Cl–, Br–, I– problems can be solved easily and reproducibly with the • ClO –, ClO –, ClO –, BrO – 2 3 4 3 Metrosep A Supp 5 - 250/4.0. The high capacity of the • ClO – at high ionic strength 4 column allows, for example, the detection of 1 µg/L • BrO – at high ionic strength 3 bromate along with 150 mg/L chloride without sample • Method development preparation. The range of applications possible with this • Universal applications column far exceeds the detection of standard anions. • Difficult matrices The Metrosep A Supp 5 - 250/4.0 is the column of choice • Difficult separation problems when it comes to reliable monitoring of the high purity • Applications with gradient standards in the semiconductor industry or of the boiler feed water of power plants. Technical information Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with qua- ternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 250 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.7 mL/min Maximum flow 0.8 mL/min Maximum pressure 15 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier 0...100% (particularly acetone, acetonitrile, methanol) pH range 3...12 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 85 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 168 mg/2 L 1.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 678 mg/2 L 3.2 mmol/L Care Regeneration e) Rinse with ultrapure water (50 min at 0.3 mL/min) Contamination with hydrophilic ions: f) Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.3 mL/min) a) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) b) Rinse with 10x concentrated eluent (100 min at With shifted system peak (regeneration method with 0.3 mL/min) column oven): c) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) a) Rinse with concentrated eluent 1 mol/L Na CO 2 3 d) Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.3 mL/min) (25 min at 0.4 mL/min) b) Maintain for 10...12 h at 45...50 °C (without rinsing) Contamination with lipophilic ions: c) Rinse with standard eluent (at least 40 min at a) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) 0.4 mL/min) b) Rinse with 5% acetonitrile (20 min at 0.3 mL/min) c) Rinse with 100% acetonitrile (60 min at 0.3 mL/min) Storage d) Rinse with 50% acetonitrile (10 min at 0.3 mL/min) In the eluent 67 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, first and last QC standard, Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 2150 injections 1 Fluoride 5.00 9 Nitrate 4.00 1 Fluoride 1.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 2 Acetate 1.00 10 Benzoate 1.00 2 Chloride 2.00 6 Phosphate 10.00 3 Formate 4.00 11 Phosphate 5.00 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 4 Chlorite 3.00 12 Selenite 3.00 4 Bromide 10.00 5 Bromate 2.00 13 Sulfate 10.00 6 Chloride 10.00 14 Succinate 4.00 7 Nitrite 5.00 15 Arsenate 3.00 8 Bromide 3.00 16 Oxalate 15.00 Carbonate eluent, fluoride in HCl (32%) dil. 1:500 Conc. (µg/L) Carbonate eluent, VIS detection (λ = 450 nm), 1 Fluoride 20.0 EPA 317.0 Conc. (µg/L) 1 Bromate 10.0 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 5 - 250/4.0 6.1006.530 Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/4.0 6.1006.500 Metrosep A Supp 5 S-Guard/4.0 6.1006.540 Metrosep A Supp 7 - 150/4.0 (6.1006.620) 68 The Metrosep A Supp 7 - 150/4.0 is the shorter A Supp Applications 7 column. It allows similarly complex separation tasks to • Standard anions be solved the same way as with the 250 mm version, • Determination of standard anions and ClO –, 2 with no significant loss in separating efficiency. Chlorite ClO –, BrO – 3 3 and bromate can thus be easily separated from standard • Complex separation tasks anions with this separation column. With the Metrosep • Applications with gradient A Supp 7 - 150/4.0, these ions are determined with certainty and precision down to the lower µg/L range. The Technical information high detection sensitivity is achieved through the use of Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with qua- the 5 µm polyvinyl alcohol polymer, with which extreme-ternary ammonium groups ly high plate numbers and thus outstanding separation Column dimensions 150 x 4.0 mm and detection properties are achieved. In addition, the Column body PEEK separation can be adapted to the specific requirements Standard flow 0.7 mL/min of the application by modifying the temperature. Maximum flow 1.0 mL/min Maximum pressure 15 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier 0...100% (particularly acetone, acetonitrile, methanol) pH range 3...12 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 76 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium carbonate 763 mg/2 L 3.6 mmol/L (standard eluent) Column temperature 45 °C Care Regeneration Contaminations with high-valency hydrophobic ions and Contamination with low-valency hydrophilic ions: organic contaminations: a) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) a) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) b) Rinse with 10x concentrated eluent (100 min at b) Rinse with 100% acetonitrile (20 min at 0.3 mL/min) 0.3 mL/min) c) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) c) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) d) Rinse with 10x concentrated eluent (100 min at d) Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.3 mL/min) 0.3 mL/min) e) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) f) Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.3 mL/min) Storage In the eluent at max. 8 °C 69 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard, 45 °C, Conc. (mg/L) Gradient: Carbonate eluent 1...6 mmol/L, 1 Fluoride 2.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 standard, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) 2 Chloride 5.00 6 Phosphate 10.00 1 Fluoride 5.00 11 Nitrate 5.00 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 2 Glycolate 5.00 12 Dibromoacetate 5.00 4 Bromide 10.00 3 Propionate 5.00 13 Phosphate 5.00 4 Butyrate 5.00 14 Sulfate 5.00 5 Methacrylate 5.00 15 Tartrate 5.00 6 Monochloroacetate 5.00 16 Selenate 5.00 7 Chloride 5.00 17 Arsenate 5.00 8 Nitrite 5.00 18 Iodide 5.00 9 Bromide 5.00 19 Thiosulfate 5.00 10 Dichloroacetate 5.00 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 7 - 150/4.0 6.1006.620 Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/4.0 6.1006.500 Metrosep A Supp 5 S-Guard/4.0 6.1006.540 Metrosep A Supp 16 Gurad/4.0 6.1031.500 Metrosep A Supp 16 S-Guard/4.0 6.1031.510 Metrosep RP 2 Guard/3.5 6.1011.030 Replacement filters for RP 2 Guard/3.5 (10 pcs.) 6.1011.130 Metrosep A Supp 7 - 250/4.0 (6.1006.630) 70 Disinfection by products from water purification are Applications suspected carcinogens. Oxohalides have therefore • Standard anions become the subject of many investigations and stan- • EPA Method 300.1 Part B, simultaneous determina-dards (e.g. EPA 300.1 Part B, EPA 317.0, EPA 326, DIN EN tion of standard anions and ClO –, ClO –, BrO – and 2 3 3 ISO 11206). Of primary concern is bromate, which forms DCA (dichloroacetic acid) from bromide during the ozonization of drinking water. • Isocratic separation of glycolate, acetate, and The Metrosep A Supp 7 - 250/4.0 is a high-performance formate separation column for the parallel determination of stan- • Complex separation tasks dard anions, oxohalides, and dichloroacetic acid. With • Applications with gradient this column, these ions are determined with certainty Technical information and precision down to the lower µg/L range. The high Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with qua- detection sensitivity is achieved through the use of the 5 ternary ammonium groups µm polyvinyl alcohol polymer, with which extremely high Column dimensions 250 x 4.0 mm plate numbers and thus outstanding separation and Column body PEEK detection properties are achieved. In addition, the sepa-Standard flow 0.7 mL/min ration can be adapted to the specific requirements of the Maximum flow 1.0 mL/min application by modifying the temperature. Maximum pressure 15 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier 0...100% (particularly acetone, acetonitrile, methanol) pH range 3...12 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 110 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium carbonate 763 mg/2 L 3.6 mmol/L (standard eluent) Column temperature 45 °C Carbonate eluent Sodium carbonate 763 mg/2 L 3.6 mmol/L (modified) Acetone 40 mL/2 L 2% Column temperature 45 °C Care Regeneration Contaminations with high-valency hydrophobic ions and Contamination with low-valency hydrophilic ions: organic contaminations: a) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) a) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) b) Rinse with 10x concentrated eluent (100 min at b) Rinse with 100% acetonitrile (20 min at 0.3 mL/min) 0.3 mL/min) c) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) c) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) d) Rinse with 10x concentrated eluent (100 min at d) Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.3 mL/min) 0.3 mL/min) e) Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.3 mL/min) f) Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.3 mL/min) Storage In the eluent at max. 8 °C Chromatograms 71 Carbonate eluent, standard, 45 °C, EPA 300.1, Carbonate eluent, drinking water, 45 °C, EPA 300.1, Parts 1 and 2 (without MCS) Conc. (mg/L) Parts 1 and 2 (with MCS) Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 2.00 7 Bromide 10.00 1 Fluoride 0.099 6 Nitrite 0.002 2 Chlorite 10.00 8 Chlorate 20.00 2 Acetate n.q. 7 Bromide 0.008 3 Bromate 20.00 9 DCA 5.00 3 Formate n.q. 8 Nitrate 4.378 4 Chloride 3.00 10 Nitrate 10.00 4 Bromate 0.002 9 Sulfate 35.62 5 System peak – 11 Phosphate 20.00 5 Chloride 6.94 6 Nitrite 10.00 12 Sulfate 15.00 Carbonate eluent, nuclear power plant, Gradient: Carbonate eluent 1...5 mmol/L, secondary circuit (simulated), 45 ° C Conc. (µg/L) standard, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 2.04 6 Nitrite 2.26 1 Galacturonate 10.00 12 Bromide 10.00 2 Glycolate 2.05 7 Bromide 2.06 2 Fluoride 2.00 13 DCA 10.00 3 Acetate 4.14 8 Nitrate 2.12 3 Glycolate 10.00 14 Nitrate 5.00 4 Formate 2.04 9 Phosphate 1.91 4 Acetate 10.00 15 Phosphite 10.00 5 Chloride 2.09 10 Sulfate 2.18 5 Propionate 10.00 16 Phosphate 10.00 6 Formate 5.00 17 Sulfate 5.00 7 Pyruvate 10.00 18 Tartrate 10.00 8 Methacrylate 10.00 19 Selenate 5.00 9 Monochloroacetate 5.00 20 Oxalate 5.00 10 Chloride 5.00 21 Arsenate 10.00 11 Nitrite 5.00 22 n. ident. – Carbonate eluent, mod. 1, «Bayer liquor» after inline neutralization 35 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 0.35 6 Sulfate 22.59 3 Acetate 9.13 7 Malonate 3.87 4 Formate 3.71 8 Succinate 1.93 5 Chloride 5.66 9 Oxalate 2.07 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 7 - 250/4.0 6.1006.630 Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/4.0 6.1006.500 Metrosep A Supp 5 S-Guard/4.0 6.1006.540 Metrosep A Supp 16 Gurad/4.0 6.1031.500 Metrosep A Supp 16 S-Guard/4.0 6.1031.510 Metrosep RP 2 Guard/3.5 6.1011.030 Replacement filters for RP 2 Guard/3.5 (10 pcs.) 6.1011.130 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 50/4.0 (6.1020.050) 72 The Metrosep A Supp 10 - 50/4.0 separation column is Applications based on a high-capacity polystyrene/divinylbenzene • Standard anions copolymer with a particle size of only 4.6 µm. This • Separation of azide and nitrate proven column concept optimized by Metrohm is charac- • Simple separation problems terized by its robust construction, high selectivity, and • Uncomplicated matrices outstanding separating efficiency. High plate numbers • Short analysis times and the favorable position of the system peak between Technical information fluoride and chloride complete its properties. Tempe ra-Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene ture, flow, and eluent composition can be used to modify copolymer with quaternary the properties of the column to accommodate current ammonium groups applications directly. Column dimensions 50 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK The short length in conjunction with the relatively low Standard flow 1.0 mL/min overall capacity of this 50 mm column enable rapid sepa-Maximum flow 2.0 mL/min rations of standard anions. They can be determined in Maximum pressure 25 MPa less than nine minutes at a flow rate of 1.0 mL/min. The Particle size 4.6 µm Metrosep A Supp 10 - 50/4.0 is well-suited to simple Organic modifier 0...100% separation problems and uncomplicated matrices. pH range 0...14 Temperature range 10...70 °C Capacity 17 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 840 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 1060 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L Column temperature 45 °C Hydroxide eluent Sodium hydroxide (30%) 20 mL/2 L 100 mmol/L Care Regeneration Storage Rinse with 50 mL of a 0.05 mol/L solution of Na EDTA at In the eluent 4 a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min. Then rinse with 0.1 mol/L NaOH at 0.5 mL/min for 1 h. Organic contaminants: Rinse with 70% methanol at 1.0 mL/min for 12 h. The addition of 1% acetic acid may be useful. 73 Chromatograms Hydroxide eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Azide 1.0 2 Nitrate 1.0 Carbonate eluent, standard, 45 °C, Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, drinking water, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Chloride 5.00 4 Bromide 10.00 1 System peak – 3 Nitrate 9.64 2 Nitrite 5.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 2 Chloride 10.05 4 Sulfate 5.19 3 Phosphate 10.00 6 Sulfate 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 10 - 50/4.0 6.1020.050 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/4.0 6.1020.500 Metrosep A Supp 10 S-Guard/4.0 6.1020.510 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 75/4.0 (6.1020.070) 74 The Metrosep A Supp 10 - 75/4.0 separation column is Applications based on a high-capacity polystyrene/divinylbenzene • Standard anions copolymer with a particle size of only 4.6 µm. Under • Air monitoring standard conditions, phosphate elutes between nitrite • Aerosols with PILS/MARGA and bromide. Applications can be optimized by modi- • Separation of sulfite and sulfate fying temperature, composition of the eluent and flow. • Phosphate in addition to cyclamate in cola beverages The capacity of the A Supp 10 - 75/4.0 has been opti-Technical information mized with respect to two aspects: matrix and speed. Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene Baseline separation is achieved in samples with high ionic copolymer with quaternary strength, e.g. for phosphate in cola beverages. Even in ammonium groups the presence of large quantities of nitrate and sulfate, the Column dimensions 75 x 4.0 mm analysis time remains less than 7.5 minutes. High sample Column body PEEK through-put is also of great importance in air analytics. Standard flow 1.0 mL/min Maximum flow 2.0 mL/min Maximum pressure 25 MPa Particle size 4.6 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 0...14 Temperature range 10...70 °C Capacity 22 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 840 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 1060 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L Column temperature 45 °C Cola eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 67 mg/2 L 0.4 mmol/L Sodium carbonate 1695 mg/2 L 8.0 mmol/L Column temperature 30 °C Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 672 mg/2 L 4.0 mmol/L (modified) Sodium carbonate 1272 mg/2 L 6.0 mmol/L Sodium perchlorate 1.2 mg/2 L 5.0 µmol/L Room temperature Care Regeneration Organic contaminants: Rinse with 50 mL of a 0.05 mol/L solution of Na EDTA at Rinse with 70% methanol at 1.0 mL/min for 12 h. The 4 a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min. Then rinse with 0.1 mol/L addition of 1% acetic acid may be useful. NaOH at 0.5 mL/min for 1 h. Storage In the eluent 75 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard, 45 °C, Conc. (mg/L) 1 Chloride 2.00 4 Bromide 10.00 2 Nitrite 5.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 3 Phosphate 10.00 6 Sulfate 10.00 Cola eluent, cola beverage, Wine eluent, temperature 45 °C, Conc. (mg/L) sample volume 250 nL, 30 °C Conc. (mg/L) flow 1.0 mL/min 1 Phosphate 587.3 1 Chloride 12.4 5 Sulfite 630.55 2 Nitrite 0.82 6 Nitrate 982.34 3 Phosphate 496.38 7 Sulfate 291.40 4 Unknown – Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 10 - 75/4.0 6.1020.070 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/4.0 6.1020.500 Metrosep A Supp 10 S-Guard/4.0 6.1020.510 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard HC/4.0 6.1020.520 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 100/4.0 (6.1020.010) 76 The Metrosep A Supp 10 - 100/4.0 separation column is Applications based on a high-capacity polystyrene/divinylbenzene • Standard anions copolymer with a particle size of only 4.6 µm. This • Separation of sulfite and sulfate column is characterized by high plate numbers and high • Simple separation problems selectivity. Sulfite and sulfate thus can be reliably sepa- • Uncomplicated matrices rated in the eluent without the addition of organic modifiers. These characteristics are completed by great Technical information flexibility with respect to column temperature, flow, and Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene the composition of the eluent. copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups The Metrosep A Supp 10 - 100/4.0 is the column of Column dimensions 100 x 4.0 mm choice for routine applications. Its robust construction, Column body PEEK excellent price-performance ratio, and very good sepa-Standard flow 1.0 mL/min rating efficiency, in conjunction with moderate chroma-Maximum flow 2.0 mL/min tography times, make the Metrosep A Supp 10 - 100/4.0 Maximum pressure 25 MPa a highly universal anion-separation column. Particle size 4.6 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 0...14 Temperature range 10...70 °C Capacity 37 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 840 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 1060 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L Column temperature 45 °C Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 672 mg/2 L 4.0 mmol/L (modified) Sodium carbonate 1272 mg/2 L 6.0 mmol/L Sodium perchlorate 1.2 mg/2 L 5.0 µmol/L Room temperature Care Regeneration Organic contaminants: Rinse with 50 mL of a 0.05 mol/L solution of Na EDTA at Rinse with 70% methanol at 1.0 mL/min for 12 h. The 4 a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min. Then rinse with 0.1 mol/L addition of 1% acetic acid may be useful. NaOH at 0.5 mL/min for 1 h. Storage In the eluent Chromatograms 77 Carbonate eluent, standard, 45 °C, Conc. (mg/L) 1 System peak – 5 Bromide 10.00 2 Chloride 5.00 6 Nitrate 10.00 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 4 Phosphate 10.00 Carbonate eluent, drinking water, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, mod., standard, room 1 System peak – 3 Nitrate 9.64 temperature Conc. (mg/L) 2 Chloride 10.05 4 Sulfate 5.19 1 Chloride 50.00 4 Bromide 10.00 2 Phosphate 10.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 3 Sulfite 10.00 6 Sulfate 50.00 Carbonate eluent, top (black), temperature 45 °C, Carbonate eluent, temperature 30...70 ° C in 5 °C increments without 5 µmol/L ClO –; bottom (red), (from top to bottom), with CO suppressor Conc. (mg/L) 4 2 temperature 25 °C, with 5 µmol/L ClO – Conc. (mg/L) 4 1 Fluoride 2.00 5 Bromide 10.00 1 System peak – 5 Bromide 10.00 2 Chloride 2.00 6 Nitrate 10.00 2 Chloride 2.00 6 Nitrate 10.00 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 4 Phosphate 10.00 4 Phosphate 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 10 - 100/4.0 6.1020.010 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/4.0 6.1020.500 Metrosep A Supp 10 S-Guard/4.0 6.1020.510 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard HC/4.0 6.1020.520 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 250/4.0 (6.1020.030) 78 The Metrosep A Supp 10 - 250/4.0 separation column is Applications based on a high-capacity polystyrene/divinylbenzene • Standard anions copolymer with a particle size of only 4.6 µm. The • Complex separation problems longest column of the A-Supp-10 product range offers • Difficult matrices the greatest selectivity and flexibility. Utilization of the • Anions in concentrated acids MSM-HC is particularly recommended with longer chro- • Aggressive matrices matogram duration. Changes in temperature, flow, and composition of the eluent also enable a wide variety of Technical information separations of anions on this separation column. Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene copolymer with quaternary Metrosep A Supp 10 - 250/4.0 has a very high capacity. ammonium groups It is suitable for samples with high ionic strength, for Column dimensions 250 x 4.0 mm complex separation tasks and for analyzing samples in Column body PEEK which great differences in concentration between the Standard flow 1.0 mL/min individual components are present. Maximum flow 2.0 mL/min Maximum pressure 25 MPa Particle size 4.6 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 0...14 Temperature range 10...70 °C Capacity 100 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 840 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 1060 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L Column temperature 45 °C Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 840 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L (modified 1) Sodium carbonate 1060 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L Acetone 50 mL 2.5% Column temperature 50 °C Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 672 mg/2 L 4.0 mmol/L (modified 2) Sodium carbonate 1272 mg/2 L 6.0 mmol/L Column temperature 45 °C Care Regeneration Organic contaminants: Column purification: Rinse with 70% methanol at 1.0 mL/min for 12 h. The Rinse with 50 mL of a 0.05 mol/L solution of Na EDTA at addition of 1% acetic acid may be useful. 4 a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min. Then rinse with 0.1 mol/L NaOH at 0.5 mL/min for 1 h. Storage In the eluent 79 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard, 45 °C, Conc. (mg/L) 1 Chloride 5.00 4 Bromide 10.00 2 Nitrite 5.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 3 Phosphate 10.00 6 Sulfate 10.00 Carbonate eluent, modified 1, artificial Carbonate eluent, modified 2, ointment based seawater 50°C, UV detection ( = 218 nm) y Conc. (mg/L) on glycol, 45 °C Conc. (mg/kg) 1 Nitrite 2.1 3 Nitrate 51.2 1 Sulfite 1028a 2 Sulfat n.q. 2 Bromide 4.4 (from metabisulfite) acalculated as metabisulfite Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 10 - 250/4.0 6.1020.030 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/4.0 6.1020.500 Metrosep A Supp 10 S-Guard/4.0 6.1020.510 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard HC/4.0 6.1020.520 Metrosep A Supp 16 - 100/4.0 (6.1031.410) 80 The Metrosep A Supp 16 is a high-capacity column Applications based on a surface-functionalized polystyrene/divinylben- • Standard anions zene copolymer. The functional groups are bonded cova- • Universal applications lently. The morphol ogy of the anion exchanger results in • Bromate (EPA 326, DIN EN ISO 11206) unique selectivity. In addition, this column type is note-worthy for its high mechanical and chemical resistance. Technical information Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene The column is well-suited to applications with a high copolymer with quaternary ionic load but which require only relatively low resolu-ammonium groups tion. Determination of bromate in water by means of the Column dimensions 100 x 4.0 mm triiodide method (EPA 326, DIN EN ISO 11206) is another Column body PEEK of the numerous applications of the Metrosep A Supp 16 Standard flow 0.8 mL/min - 100/4.0. Maximum flow 1.2 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa Particle size 4.6 µm Organic modifier 0...10% pH range 0...14 Temperature range 10...70 °C Capacity 80 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate/hydroxide eluent Sodium carbonate 1590 mg/2 L 7.5 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium hydroxide 6.0 mL/2 L 0.75 mmol/L (c = 0.25 mol/L) Column temperature 45 °C Sulfuric acid eluent Sulfuric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 200 mL/2 L 100 mmol/L Ammonium heptamolybdate 19.3 mL/2 L 19.3 µmol/L (c = 2 mmol/L) Column temperature 45 °C PCR reagent Potassium iodide 90 g/2 L 0.27 mol/L Care Regeneration Eluent change Rinse the column overnight (12 h) with standard eluent When installing or changing to eluents which have an at a low flow rate (0.4 mL/min). organic modifier to avoid high backpressure, adjust the flow in small increments from 0.4 mL/min to match Rinse the column with one third of the standard flow in standard conditions within one hour while maintaining the opposite direction for 2 h with 15 mmol/L Na CO the direction of flow. 2 3 and then for 2 h with ultrapure water. Storage In the eluent 81 Chromatograms Carbonate/hydroxide eluent, standard, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 2.00 5 Bromide 10.00 2 Chloride 2.00 6 Nitrate 10.00 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 4 System peak – 8 Phosphate 10.00 Carbonate/hydroxide eluent, drinking water, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) Sulfuric acid eluent, triiodide method 1 Fluoride n.q. 4 Nitrate 9.7 with UV/VIS detection drinking water, 45 °C Conc. (µg/L) 2 Chloride 9.2 5 Sulfate 10.2 1 Bromate 0.6 3 System peak – Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 16 - 100/4.0 6.1031.410 Metrosep A Supp 16 Guard/4.0 6.1031.500 Metrosep A Supp 16 S-Guard/4.0 6.1031.510 Metrosep A Supp 16 - 150/4.0 (6.1031.420) 82 The Metrosep A Supp 16 is ideal for high-capacity sepa-Applications ration problems and excels in its outstanding resolution. • Standard anions The Metrosep A Supp 16 - 150/4.0 is based on a surface- • Universal applications functionalized polystyrene/divinylbenzene copolymer. • Azide/nitrate separation The functional groups are bonded covalently. • Matrices with high ionic strength • Applications with gradient The Metrosep A Supp 16 - 150/4.0 is characterized by outstanding resolution and solves the most difficult sepa-Technical information ration problems. The column is well-suited to applications Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene with a high ionic load but which do not require the high-copolymer with quaternary est resolution. It is one of the standard columns in anion ammonium groups chromatography. Column dimensions 150 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.8 mL/min Maximum flow 1.2 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa Particle size 4.6 µm Organic modifier 0...10% pH range 0...14 Temperature range 10...70 °C Capacity 125 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate/hydroxide eluent Sodium carbonate 1590 mg/2 L 7.5 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium hydroxide 6.0 mL/2 L 0.75 mmol/L (c = 0.25 mol/L) Column temperature 45 °C Care Regeneration Eluent change Rinse the column overnight (12 h) with standard eluent When installing or changing to eluents which have an at a low flow rate (0.4 mL/min). organic modifier to avoid high backpressure, adjust the flow in small increments from 0.4 mL/min to match Rinse the column with one third of the standard flow in standard conditions within one hour while maintaining the opposite direction for 2 h with 15 mmol/L Na CO the direction of flow. 2 3 and then for 2 h with ultrapure water. Storage In the eluent 83 Chromatograms Carbonate/hydroxide eluent, gypsum eluate, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 1.482 4 Nitrate 0.004 2 Chloride 0.132 5 Sulfate n.q. 3 Bromide 0.015 Carbonate/hydroxide eluent, standard, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate/hydroxide eluent, drinking water, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 2.00 5 Bromide 10.00 1 Fluoride n.q. 4 Nitrate 9.7 2 Chloride 2.00 6 Nitrate 10.00 2 Chloride 9.2 5 Sulfate 10.2 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 3 System peak – 4 System peak – 8 Phosphate 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 16 - 150/4.0 6.1031.420 Metrosep A Supp 16 Guard/4.0 6.1031.500 Metrosep A Supp 16 S-Guard/4.0 6.1031.510 Metrosep A Supp 16 - 250/4.0 (6.1031.430) 84 The Metrosep A Supp 16 is ideal for high-capacity separa-Applications tion problems and distinguishes itself with its outstanding • Standard anions resolution, even in complex separation problems. The • Universal applications Metrosep A Supp 16 separation column is based on a • Oligosaccharides and polysaccharides surface-functionalized polystyrene/divinylbenzene copoly- • Separation of organic acids mer. The functional groups are bonded covalently. This and • Cl–, SO 2– in electroplating baths 4 the surface structure of the anion exchanger results in • Quality monitoring of high-purity chemicals unique selectivity. The high-capacity Metrosep A Supp 16 (e.g. conc. acids) is used for solving complex problems. • Complex separation problems • Difficult matrices The Metrosep A Supp 16 - 250/4.0 is characterized by outstanding resolution and solves the most difficult separa-Technical information tion problems. The column is very well-suited to monitor-Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene ing electroplating baths. Traces of anions can be deter-copolymer with quaternary mined in concentrated acids. Utilization in food analysis ammonium groups for the determination of maltose derivatives is only one Column dimensions 250 x 4.0 mm more of the numerous applications of the high-capacity Column body PEEK Metrosep A Supp 16 - 250/4.0. Standard flow 0.8 mL/min Maximum flow 1.2 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa Particle size 4.6 µm Organic modifier 0...10% pH range 0...14 Temperature range 10...70 °C Capacity 195 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate/hydroxide eluent Sodium carbonate 1590 mg/2 L 7.5 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium hydroxide 6.0 mL/2 L 0.75 mmol/L (c = 0.25 mol/L) Column temperature 45 °C Hydroxide eluent Sodium hydroxide 4.0 mL/2 L 20 mmol/L (c = 10 mol/L) Column temperature 32 °C Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 420 mg/2 L 2.5 mmol/L Sodium carbonate 1166 mg/2 L 5.5 mmol/L Column temperature 45 °C Care Regeneration Eluent change Rinse the column overnight (12 h) with standard eluent When installing or changing to eluents which have an at a low flow rate (0.4 mL/min). organic modifier to avoid high backpressure, adjust the flow in small increments from 0.4 mL/min to match Rinse the column with one third of the standard flow in standard conditions within one hour while maintaining the opposite direction for 2 h with 15 mmol/L Na CO the direction of flow. 2 3 and then for 2 h with ultrapure water. Storage In the eluent 85 Chromatograms Carbonate/hydroxide eluent, standard, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 2.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 2 Chloride 2.00 6 Sulfate 10.00 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Phosphate 10.00 4 Bromide 10.00 Hydroxide eluent, maltose derivative, 32 °C; PAD Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, diluted sulfuric acid 1 Glucose 5.00 5 Maltopentaose 20.00 after neutralization Conc. (mg/L) 2 Maltose 5.00 6 Maltohexaose 30.00 1 Fluoride 0.50 6 Bromide 0.50 3 Maltotriose 10.00 7 Maltoheptaose 40.00 2 Formate n.q. 7 Nitrate 0.50 4 Maltotetraose 10.00 3 Acetate n.q. 8 Phosphate 0.50 4 Chloride 0.50 9 Sulfate n.q. 5 Nitrite 0.50 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 16 - 250/4.0 6.1031.430 Metrosep A Supp 16 Guard/4.0 6.1031.500 Metrosep A Supp 16 S-Guard/4.0 6.1031.510 Metrosep A Supp 17 - 100/4.0 (6.01032.410) 86 The Metrosep A-Supp-17 columns are anion separation Applications columns for use at room temperature with a very good • Anion determinations at room temperature price-performance ratio. The Metrosep A Supp 17 - • Simple water analysis 100/4.0 enables rapid separation of the standard anions. Thanks to its great flexibility with respect to flow rates Technical information (up to 1.8 mL/min), very short analysis times can be Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene achieved, depending on the separation problem. copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 100 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.6 mL/min Maximum flow 1.8 mL/min Maximum pressure 18 MPa Particle size 5.0 µm Organic modifier 0...100% methanol 0...40% acetone or acetonitrile pH range 0...14 Temperature range 10...70 °C Standard temperature 25 °C Capacity 43 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 33.6 mg/2 L 0.2 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 1.060 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L Care Organic contamination Preparation 1. Rinse with 70% methanol (16 h at 0.3 mL/min) Rinse the column with eluent for 2 - 3 h. 2. Rinse with standard eluent (120 min at 0.3 mL/min) Regeneration Storage Inorganic contamination In the eluent 1. Rinse with ultrapure water (20 min at 0.3 mL/min) 2. Rinse with 10x concentrated standard eluent (120 min at 0.3 mL/min) 3. Rinse with ultrapure water (20 min at 0.3 mL/min) 4. Rinse with standard eluent (120 min at 0.3 mL/min) 87 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, rain water, 100 µL Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 2.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 1 Chloride 0.04 4 Sulfate 0.18 2 Chloride 2.00 6 Sulfate 10.00 2 Nitrite 0.01 5 Phosphate – 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Phosphate 10.00 3 Nitrate 0.27 4 Bromide 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 17 - 100/4.0 6.01032.410 Metrosep A Supp 17 Guard/4.0 6.01032.500 Metrosep A Supp 17 S-Guard/4.0 6.01032.510 Metrosep A Supp 17 - 150/4.0 (6.01032.420) 88 The separation column Metrosep A Supp 17 - 150/4.0 is Applications the column of choice for anion determinations that • Anion determinations at room temperature require good separating efficiency and short separation • Water analysis times at room temperature. The maximum flow rate of 1.4 mL/min offers in this connection the possibility of Technical information optimizing the determination. The Metrosep A-Supp-17 Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene columns convince with their good price-performance copolymer with quaternary ratio. ammonium groups Column dimensions 150 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.6 mL/min Maximum flow 1.4 mL/min Maximum pressure 18 MPa Particle size 5.0 µm Organic modifier 0...100% methanol 0...40% acetone or acetonitrile pH range 0...14 Temperature range 10...70 °C Capacity 65 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 33.6 mg/2 L 0.2 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 1.060 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L Care Organic contamination Preparation 1. Rinse with 70% methanol (16 h at 0.3 mL/min) Rinse the column with eluent for 2 - 3 h. 2. Rinse with standard eluent (120 min at 0.3 mL/min) Regeneration Storage Inorganic contamination In the eluent 1. Rinse with ultrapure water (20 min at 0.3 mL/min) 2. Rinse with 10x concentrated standard eluent (120 min at 0.3 mL/min) 3. Rinse with ultrapure water (20 min at 0.3 mL/min) 4. Rinse with standard eluent (120 min at 0.3 mL/min) 89 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 1.25 5 Nitrate 25.00 2 Chloride 25.00 6 Sulfate 50.00 3 Nitrite 1.25 7 Phosphate 1.25 4 Bromide 1.25 Carbonate eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, 0.8 mL/min flow, Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride < 1 4 Nitrate 8.77 mineral water 2 Chloride 9.79 5 Sulfate 5.83 1 Fluoride < 1 3 Nitrate 3.80 3 System peak – 2 Chloride 9.55 4 Sulfate 13.25 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 17 - 150/4.0 6.01032.420 Metrosep A Supp 17 Guard/4.0 6.01032.500 Metrosep A Supp 17 S-Guard/4.0 6.01032.510 Metrosep A Supp 17 - 250/4.0 (6.01032.430) 90 The Metrosep A Supp 17 - 250/4.0 combines high sepa- Applications rating efficiency with a good price-performance ratio • Anion determinations at room temperature without requiring the use of a column oven. The polysty- • Water analysis rene/divinylbenzene basic material used guarantees a • Wastewater analysis long service life for the column. Complex separation • Difficult matrices tasks can be solved on this column. Technical information Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 250 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.6 mL/min Maximum flow 0.9 mL/min Maximum pressure 18 MPa Particle size 5.0 µm Organic modifier 0...100% methanol 0...40% acetone or acetonitrile pH range 0...14 Temperature range 10...70 °C Capacity 109 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 33.6 mg/2 L 0.2 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 1.060 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L Hydroxide eluent Sodium hydroxide (c = 10 mol/L) 10 mL/2 L 50 mmol/L Care Organic contamination Preparation 1. Rinse with 70% methanol (16 h at 0.3 mL/min) Rinse the column with eluent for 2 - 3 h. 2. Rinse with standard eluent (120 min at 0.3 mL/min) Regeneration Storage Inorganic contamination In the eluent 1. Rinse with ultrapure water (20 min at 0.3 mL/min) 2. Rinse with 10x concentrated standard eluent (120 min at 0.3 mL/min) 3. Rinse with ultrapure water (20 min at 0.3 mL/min) 4. Rinse with standard eluent (120 min at 0.3 mL/min) 91 Chromatograms Dose-in Gradient: Hydroxide eluent Conc. (mg/L) 10…50 mmol/L, standard 1 Fluoride 2.0 5 Nitrate 10.0 2 Chloride 2.0 6 Sulfate 10.0 3 Nitrite 10.0 7 Phosphate 10.0 4 Bromide 10.0 Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, treated wastewater Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 1.25 5 Nitrate 25.00 1 Fluoride < 1 5 Nitrate 21.5 2 Chloride 25.00 6 Sulfate 50.00 2 Chloride 102.7 6 Sulfate 29.7 3 Nitrite 1.25 7 Phosphate 1.25 3 Nitrite < 1 7 Phosphate < 1 4 Bromide 1.25 4 Bromide < 1 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 17 - 250/4.0 6.01032.430 Metrosep A Supp 17 Guard/4.0 6.01032.500 Metrosep A Supp 17 S-Guard/4.0 6.01032.510 92 Separation columns 93 Microbore IC anion-separation columns for lower eluent consumption and greater sensitivity Metrosep A Supp 4 - 250/2.0 (6.01021.230) 94 The microbore column Metrosep A Supp 4 - 250/2.0 is an Applications extremely robust column with very good separation prop- • Standard anions erties. The separation phase is comprised of polyvinyl • Water analysis alcohol particles with quaternary ammonium groups and a • Difficult matrices diameter of 9 µm. This structure guarantees great stability • Critical samples and a greater tolerance to very small particles that could • Iodide pass through the integrated filter pad. The Metrosep A • IC-MS coupling Supp 4 - 250/2.0 has a medium ion exchange capacity and is particularly suitable for all routine tasks in water analysis. Technical information Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with To protect the IC separation column – even though it is not quaternary particularly sensitive to contaminants – we recommend the ammonium groups use of the Metrosep A Supp 4 Guard/2.0 or the A Supp 4 Column dimensions 250 x 2.0 mm S-Guard/2.0. Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.25 mL/min Maximum flow 0.7 mL/min Maximum pressure 15 MPa Particle size 9 µm Organic modifier 0...100% (particularly acetone, acetonitrile, methanol) pH range 3...12 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 11 µmol (Cl–) Eluent With chemical suppression Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 286 mg/2 L 1.7 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 382 mg/2 L 1.8 mmol/L Care Contamination with lipophilic ions: Regeneration a) Rinse with ultrapure water (15 min at 0.1 mL/min) Contamination with hydrophilic ions: b) Rinse with 5% acetonitrile (10 min at 0.1 mL/min) a) Rinse with ultrapure water (15 min at 0.1 mL/min) c) Rinse with 100% acetonitrile (60 min at 0.1 mL/min) b) Rinse with 10x concentrated eluent d) Rinse with 50% acetonitrile (10 min at 0.1 mL/min) (60 min at 0.1 mL/min) e) Rinse with ultrapure water (30 min at 0.1 mL/min) c) Rinse with ultrapure water (15 min at 0.1 mL/min) f) Rinse with eluent (60 min at 0.1 mL/min) d) Rinse with eluent (60 min at 0.1 mL/min) Storage In the eluent 95 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, treated wastewater Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 0.008 4 Phosphate 0.080 1 Fluoride 0.16 4 Nitrate 26.75 2 Chloride 4.000 5 Sulfate 1.200 2 Unknown – 5 Phosphate 0.99 3 Nitrate 0.800 3 Chloride 113.72 6 Sulfate 30.66 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 4 - 250/2.0 6.01021.230 Metrosep A Supp 4 Guard/2.0 6.01021.600 Metrosep A Supp 4 S-Guard/2.0 6.01021.610 Metrosep A Supp 5 - 150/2.0 (6.1006.220) 96 The Metrosep A Supp 5 - 150/2.0 in the microbore version Applications is distinguished for its excellent separation properties. The • Standard anions particle size of 5 µm makes a decisive contribution to the • F-, Cl-, Br-, I- separating efficiency of this column. The Metrosep A Supp • ClO -, ClO -, ClO -, BrO - 2 3 4 3 5 - 150/2.0 offers the optimum combination of selectivity • Cr (VI) (CrO 2-) 4 and capacity, with which even complex separation tasks • Method development can be solved within a short time. The 2 mm Metrosep A • IC-MS coupling Supp 5 separation columns are packed with the same Technical information material as the corresponding 4 mm separation columns. Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with The 150 mm version of this column type is used for univer-quarternary ammonium sal applications at low eluent consumption. groups Column dimensions 150 x 2.0 mm With its low eluent flow, this column is particularly suitable Column body PEEK for IC/MS coupling. Standard flow 0.18 mL/min Maximum flow 0.21 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier 0...100% (particularly acetone, acetonitrile, methanol) pH range 3...12 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 12 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 168 mg/2 L 1.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 678 mg/2 L 3.2 mmol/L Care Regeneration Shifted system peak Contamination with low-valence hydrophilic ions 1. Regeneration method with column oven 1. Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.1 mL/min) 2. Rinse with concentrated eluent of 1 mol/L Na CO 2 3 2. Rinse with 10x concentrated eluent (100 min at 0.1 (25 min at 0.1 mL/min) mL/min) 3. Maintain for 10...12 hours at 45...50 °C (without 3. Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.1 mL/min) rinsing) 4. Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.1 mL/min) 4. Rinse with the normal eluent (at least 40 min at 0.1 mL/min) Contamination with high-valence hydrophobic ions or organic contaminations Storage 1. Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.1 mL/min) In the eluent 2. Rinse with 5% acetonitrile (20 min at 0.1 mL/min) 3. Rinse with 100% acetonitrile (60 min at 0.1 mL/min) 4. Rinse with 50% acetonitrile (10 min at 0.1 mL/min) 5. Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.1 mL/min) 6. Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.1 mL/min) 97 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, polyethylene pellets by 1 Fluoride 2.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 Combustion IC (CIC) Conc. (mg/kg) 2 Chloride 2.00 6 Phosphate 10.00 1 Chloride 94.2 3 Sulfate 74.7 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 2 Bromide 84.0 4 Bromide 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 5 - 150/2.0 6.1006.220 Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/2.0 6.1006.600 Metrosep A Supp 5 S-Guard/2.0 6.1006.610 Metrosep A Supp 5 - 250/2.0 (6.1006.230) 98 The Metrosep A Supp 5 - 250/2.0 is the microbore high-Applications performance separation column with which even complex • Standard anions separation problems can be solved easily and reproducibly. • F-, Cl-, Br-, I- The range of applications possible with this column far • ClO -, ClO -, ClO -, BrO - 2 3 4 3 exceeds the detection of standard anions. The Metrosep A • ClO - at high ionic strength 4 Supp 5 - 250/2.0 is used wherever maximum separating • BrO - at high ionic strength 3 efficiency must be combined with both the lowest of • Method development detection limits and low eluent consumption. • Universal applications • Difficult matrices With its low eluent flow, this column is particularly suitable • Complex separation problems for IC/MS coupling. • Applications with gradient • IC-MS coupling Technical information Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with quarternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 250 x 2.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.18 mL/min Maximum flow 0.21 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier 0...100% (particularly acetone, acetonitrile, methanol) pH range 3...12 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 21 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 168 mg/2 L 1.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 678 mg/2 L 3.2 mmol/L Care Regeneration 5. Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.1 mL/min) Contamination with low-valence hydrophilic ions 6. Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.1 mL/min) 1. Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.1 mL/min) 2. Rinse with 10x concentrated eluent (100 min at 0.1 Shifted system peak mL/min) 1. Regeneration method with column oven 3. Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.1 mL/min) 2. Rinse with concentrated eluent of 1 mol/L Na CO 2 3 4. Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.1 mL/min) (25 min at 0.1 mL/min) 3. Maintain for 10...12 hours at 45...50 °C (without Contamination with high-valence hydrophobic ions or rinsing) organic contaminations 4. Rinse with the normal eluent (at least 40 min at 0.1 1. Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.1 mL/min) mL/min) 2. Rinse with 5% acetonitrile (20 min at 0.1 mL/min) 3. Rinse with 100% acetonitrile (60 min at 0.1 mL/min) Storage 4. Rinse with 50% acetonitrile (10 min at 0.1 mL/min) In the eluent 99 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 1.0 8 Benzoate 4.0 2 Formate 1.0 9 Phosphate 2.0 3 Monochloroacetate 2.0 10 Sulfate 2.0 4 Chloride 1.0 11 Oxalate 1.0 5 Nitrite 1.0 12 Tungstate 2.0 6 Bromide 2.0 13 Molybdate 2.0 7 Nitrate 2.0 14 Iodide 2.0 Carbonate eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 2.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 1 Fluoride 0.09 3 Nitrate 7.09 2 Chloride 2.00 6 Phosphate 10.00 2 Chloride 9.58 4 Sulfate 3.86 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 4 Bromide 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 5 - 250/2.0 6.1006.230 Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/2.0 6.1006.600 Metrosep A Supp 5 S-Guard/2.0 6.1006.610 Metrosep A Supp 7 - 150/2.0 (6.1006.640) 100 The Metrosep A Supp 7 - 150/2.0 is the shorter of the two Applications A Supp 7 columns in the microbore version. It allows simi- • Standard anions larly complex separation tasks to be solved the same way • Fast analysis (high flow rate) as with the corresponding 250 mm version, with no sig- • Applications with gradient nificant loss in separating efficiency. • IC-MS With the Metrosep A Supp 7 - 150/2.0, these ions are Technical information determined with certainty and precision down to the lower Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with µg/L range. High detection sensitivity is achieved by using quarternary ammonium the 5 µm polyvinyl alcohol polymer, which allows extreme-groups ly high plate numbers and therefore outstanding separa-Column dimensions 150 x 2.0 mm tion and detection properties can be achieved. In addition, Column body PEEK the separation can be adapted to the specific requirements Standard flow 0.2 mL/min of the application by modifying the temperature. Maximum flow 0.6 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa This microbore column is particularly suitable for use with Particle size 5 µm an MS detector. Organic modifier 0...100% (particularly acetone, acetonitrile and methanol) pH range 3...12 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 18 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium carbonate 763 mg/2 L 3.6 mmol/L (standard eluent) (column temperature: 45 °C) Carbonate eluent Sodium carbonate 878 mg/2 L 4.0 mmol/L (modified) (column temperature: 55 °C) Care Regeneration procedure for contamination with low- Regeneration procedure for contamination with high- valency hydrophilic ions: valency hydrophobic ions and organic contaminations: 1. Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.1 mL/min) 1. Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.1 mL/min) 2. Rinse with 10x concentrated eluent (100 min at 2. Rinse with 100% acetonitrile (20 min at 0.1 mL/min) 0.1 mL/min) 3. Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.1 mL/min) 3. Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.1 mL/min) 4. Rinse with 10x concentrated eluent (100 min at 4. Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.1 mL/min) 0.1 mL/min) 5. Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.1 mL/min) 6. Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.1 mL/min) Storage In the eluent at maximum +8 °C. 101 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent (mod.), standard, 55 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 2.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 1 Fluoride 1.00 6 Phosphate 1.00 2 Chloride 2.00 6 Phosphate 10.00 2 Chloride 1.00 7 Sulfate 1.00 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 3 Nitrite 1.00 8 Thiosulfate 1.00 4 Bromide 10.00 4 Bromide 1.00 9 Thiocyanate 1.00 5 Nitrate 1.00 10 Perchlorate 1.00 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 7 - 150/2.0 6.1006.640 Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/2.0 6.1006.600 Metrosep A Supp 5 S-Guard/2.0 6.1006.610 Metrosep A Supp 16 Guard/2.0 6.1031.600 Metrosep A Supp 16 S-Guard/2.0 6.1031.610 Metrosep A Supp 7 - 250/2.0 (6.1006.650) 102 Disinfection byproducts from water treatment are sus- Applications pected not only of being health hazards but also of being • Standard anions carcinogenic. Oxyhalides have therefore become the sub- • EPA 300.1 Part B, simultaneous determination of ject of many investigations and standards (e.g., EPA 300.1 standard anions and ClO -, ClO -, BrO - and DCA 2 3 3 Part B, EPA 317.0, EPA 326.0). Of primary concern is bro- (dichloroacetic acid) mate, which forms from bromide during the ozonization of • Isocratic separation of glycolate, acetate and drinking water. formate • Complex separation tasks The microbore version of the Metrosep A Supp 7 - 250/4.0 • Applications with gradient is a high-performance separation column for the parallel • IC-MS determination of standard anions, oxyhalides and dichloroacetic acid. With this column, these ions are determined Technical information with certainty and precision down to the lower µg/L range. Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with High detection sensitivity is achieved by using the 5 µm quarternary ammonium polyvinyl alcohol polymer, which allows extremely high groups plate numbers and therefore outstanding separation and Column dimensions 250 x 2.0 mm detection properties can be achieved. In addition, the Column body PEEK separation can be adapted to the specific requirements of Standard flow 0.2 mL/min the application by modifying the temperature. Maximum flow 0.4 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa This microbore column is particularly suitable for use with Particle size 5 µm an MS detector. Organic modifier 0...100% (particularly acetone, acetonitrile and methanol) pH range 3...12 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 27 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium carbonate 763 mg/2 L 3.6 mmol/L (standard eluent) (column temperature: 45 °C) Care Regeneration procedure for contamination with low- Regeneration procedure for contamination with high- valency hydrophilic ions: valency hydrophobic ions and organic contaminations: 1. Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.1 mL/min) 1. Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.1 mL/min) 2. Rinse with 10x concentrated eluent (100 min at 2. Rinse with 100% acetonitrile (20 min at 0.1 mL/min) 0.1 mL/min) 3. Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.1 mL/min) 3. Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.1 mL/min) 4. Rinse with 10x concentrated eluent (100 min at 4. Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.1 mL/min) 0.1 mL/min) 5. Rinse with ultrapure water (25 min at 0.1 mL/min) 6. Rinse with eluent (100 min at 0.1 mL/min) Storage In the eluent at maximum +8 °C. 103 Chromatogram Carbonate eluent, standard, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, standard, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 2.0 7 Chlorate 1.0 1 Fluoride 0.1 7 Nitrate 0.1 2 Chlorite 1.0 8 Dichloroacetate 1.0 2 Acetate 0.1 8 Phosphate 0.1 3 Bromate 1.0 9 Nitrate 30.0 3 Fromate 0.1 9 Sulfate 0.1 4 Chloride 10.0 10 Phosphate 15.0 4 Chloride 0.1 10 Malonate 0.1 5 Nitrite 5.0 11 Sulfate 40.0 5 Nitrite 0.1 11 Succinate 0.1 6 Bromide 1.0 6 Bromide 0.1 12 Oxalate 0.1 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 7 - 250/2.0 6.1006.650 Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/2.0 6.1006.600 Metrosep A Supp 5 S-Guard/2.0 6.1006.610 Metrosep A Supp 16 Guard/2.0 6.1031.600 Metrosep A Supp 16 S-Guard/2.0 6.1031.610 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 50/2.0 (6.1020.250) 104 The Metrosep A Supp 10 - 50/2.0 separation column is Applications based on a high-capacity polystyrene/divinylbenzene • Standard anions copolymer with a particle size of only 4.6 µm. Tem pe ra- • Simple separation problems ture, flow and eluent composition can be used to modify • Uncomplicated matrices the properties of the column to accommodate the cur- • Short analysis times rent application directly. The 2 mm Metrosep A Supp 10 • IC-MS coupling separation columns are packed with the same material as the corresponding 4 mm separation columns. The short Technical information length and associated relatively low overall capacity of Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene this 50 mm column enable very rapid separations of copolymer with quaternary standard anions. ammonium groups Column dimensions 50 x 2.0 mm The Metrosep A Supp 10 - 50/2.0 is well-suited to simple Column body PEEK separation problems and uncomplicated matrices. Thanks Standard flow 0.25 mL/min to its low flow, this microbore separation column is ideal Maximum flow 1.3 mL/min for IC-MS applications. Maximum pressure 25 MPa Particle size 4.6 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 0...14 Temperature range 10...70 °C Capacity 4.6 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 840 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 1060 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L Column temperature 45 °C Care Regeneration Organic contaminants: Rinse with 50 mL of a 0.05 mol/L solution of Na EDTA at Rinse with 70% methanol at 0.12 mL/min for 12 h. The 4 a flow rate of 0.12 mL/min. Then rinse with 0.1 mol/L addition of 1% acetic acid may be useful. NaOH at 0.12 mL/min for 1 h. Storage In the eluent 105 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard, 45 °C, Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, drinking water, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Chloride 2.00 4 Bromide 10.00 1 Chloride 10.85 3 Sulfate 5.38 2 Nitrite 5.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 2 Nitrate 8.98 3 Phosphate 10.00 6 Sulfate 10.00 Carbonate eluent, drinking water, Conc. (mg/L) high flow (1.0 mL/min), 45 °C) 1 Chloride 2.48 3 Sulfate 1.28 2 Nitrate 2.15 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 10 - 50/2.0 6.1020.250 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/2.0 6.1020.600 Metrosep A Supp 10 S-Guard/2.0 6.1020.610 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 75/2.0 (6.1020.270) 106 The Metrosep A Supp 10 - 75/2.0 separation column is Applications based on a high-capacity polystyrene/divinylbenzene • Standard anions copolymer with a particle size of only 4.6 µm. This • IC-MS coupling proven column concept optimized by Metrohm is • Separation of sulfite and sulfate characterized by its robust construction, great selectivity • Fermentation samples and outstanding separating efficiency. The 2 mm Metrosep A Supp 10 separation columns are packed with Technical information the same material as the corresponding 4 mm separation Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene columns. Temperature, flow and eluent composition can copolymer with quaternary be used to modify the properties of the column to ammonium groups accommodate the current application directly. Column dimensions 75 x 2.0 mm Column body PEEK The capacity of the Metrosep A Supp 10 - 75/2.0 has Standard flow 0.25 mL/min been optimized with respect to two aspects: matrix and Maximum flow 1.1 mL/min speed. A rapid baseline separation of the standard anions Maximum pressure 25 MPa can also be achieved in samples of high ionic strength. Particle size 4.6 µm Particularly suitable for IC-MS applications. Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 0...14 Temperature range 10...70 °C Capacity 6.9 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 840 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 1060 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L Column temperature 45 °C Care Regeneration Organic contaminants: Rinse with 50 mL of a 0.05 mol/L solution of Na EDTA at Rinse with 70% methanol at 0.12 mL/min for 12 h. The 4 a flow rate of 0.12 mL/min. Then rinse with 0.1 mol/L addition of 1% acetic acid may be useful. NaOH at 0.12 mL/min for 1 h. Storage In the eluent 107 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, fermentation broth Conc. (g/L) Dilution 1 : 100, 45 °C 1 Chloride 0.025 3 Phosphate 1.249 2 Nitrite 6.461 Carbonate eluent, standard, 45 °C, Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate eluent, drinking water, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Chloride 2.00 4 Bromide 10.00 1 Fluoride n.q. 3 Nitrate 8.27 2 Nitrite 5.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 2 Chloride 9.02 4 Sulfate 4.20 3 Phosphate 10.00 6 Sulfate 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 10 - 75/2.0 6.1020.270 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/2.0 6.1020.600 Metrosep A Supp 10 S-Guard/2.0 6.1020.610 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 100/2.0 (6.1020.210) 108 The Metrosep A Supp 10 - 100/2.0 separation column is Applications based on a high-capacity polystyrene/divinylbenzene • Standard anions copolymer with a particle size of only 4.6 µm. Tempe ra- • Simple separation problems ture, flow and eluent composition can be used to modify • Traces of cyanide and sulfide with PAD the properties of the column to accommodate the cur- • Uncomplicated matrices rent application directly. The 2 mm Metrosep A Supp 10 • IC-MS coupling separation columns are packed with the same material as the corresponding 4 mm separation columns. Technical information Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene The Metrosep A Supp 10 - 100/2.0 is the microbore copolymer with quaternary column of choice for routine applications. Thanks to the ammonium groups high flow and pressure stability of this separation Column dimensions 100 x 2.0 mm column, very rapid chromatograms with good separation Column body PEEK of the ions can be achieved. The standard anions can Standard flow 0.25 mL/min thus be separated within less than three minutes. Maximum flow 0.9 mL/min Particularly suitable for IC-MS applications. Maximum pressure 25 MPa Particle size 4.6 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 0...14 Temperature range 10...70 °C Capacity 8.7 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 840 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 1060 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L Column temperature 45 °C Hydroxide/EDTA eluent Sodium hydroxide 10 mL/2 L 100 mmol/L (c = 20 mol/L) EDTA 2.0 mg/2 L 0.007 mmol/L Column temperature 35 °C Care Regeneration Organic contaminants: Rinse with 50 mL of a 0.05 mol/L solution of Na EDTA at Rinse with 70% methanol at 0.12 mL/min for 12 h. The 4 a flow rate of 0.12 mL/min. Then rinse with 0.1 mol/L addition of 1% acetic acid may be useful. NaOH at 0.12 mL/min for 1 h. Storage In the eluent 109 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard, 45 °C, Conc. (mg/L) 1 Chloride 2.00 4 Bromide 10.00 2 Nitrite 5.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 3 Phosphate 10.00 6 Sulfate 10.00 Carbonate eluent, drinking water, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) Hydroxide/EDTA eluent, standard, 35 °C Conc. (µg/L) 1 Fluoride n.q. 3 Nitrate 10.69 1 Sulfide 10.00 2 Chloride 11.02 4 Sulfate 5.85 2 Cyanide 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 10 - 100/2.0 6.1020.210 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/2.0 6.1020.600 Metrosep A Supp 10 S-Guard/2.0 6.1020.610 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 150/2.0 (6.1020.220) 110 The Metrosep A Supp 10 - 150/2.0 separation column is Applications based on a high-capacity polystyrene/divinylbenzene • Standard anions copolymer with a particle size of only 4.6 µm. This pro - • Universal applications ven column concept optimized by Metrohm is charac te- • Different matrices rized by its robust construction, great selectivity and • Transition metal complexes outstanding separating efficiency. The 2 mm Metrosep A • Chromium(VI) in toys (EU directive 2009/48/EC) Supp 10 separation columns are packed with the same • IC-MS coupling material as the corresponding 4 mm separation columns. Temperature, flow and eluent composition can be used Technical information to modify the properties of the column to accommodate Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene the current application directly. copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups The Metrosep A Supp 10 - 150/2.0 separation column is Column dimensions 150 x 2.0 mm suitable for complex separation tasks with wide diffeColumn body PEEK rences in concentrations. The microbore version exhibits Standard flow 0.25 mL/min low eluent consumption and is therefore particularly Maximum flow 0.7 mL/min suitable for IC-MS applications. Maximum pressure 25 MPa Particle size 4.6 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 0...14 Temperature range 10...70 °C Capacity 15 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 840 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 1060 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L Column temperature 45 °C Dipicolinic acid eluent Dipicolinic acid 1.0 g/2 L 3.0 mmol/L Sodium sulfate 1.42 g/2 L 10 mmol/L Sodium hydroxide 6.6 mL/2 L 66 mmol/L (c = 20 mol/L) Formic acid pH = 4.33 Care Regeneration Organic contaminants: Column purification: Rinse with 70% methanol at 0.12 mL/min for 12 h. The Rinse with 50 mL of a 0.05 mol/L solution of Na EDTA at addition of 1% acetic acid may be useful. 4 a flow rate of 0.12 mL/min. Then rinse with 0.1 mol/L NaOH at 0.12 mL/min for 1 h. Storage In the eluent 111 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Chloride 2.00 4 Bromide 10.00 2 Nitrite 5.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 3 Phosphate 10.00 6 Sulfate 10.00 Carbonate eluent, drinking water, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) Dipicolinic acid eluent, PCR with PAR, 510 nm, 55 °C Conc. (µg/L) 1 Fluoride n.q. 3 Nitrate 10.69 1 Iron(III) 12.40 5 Cobalt 10.00 2 Chloride 11.02 4 Sulfate 5.85 2 Copper 10.00 6 Cadmium 10.00 3 Nickel 10.00 7 Iron(II) 7.5 4 Zinc 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 10 - 150/2.0 6.1020.220 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/2.0 6.1020.600 Metrosep A Supp 10 S-Guard/2.0 6.1020.610 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 250/2.0 (6.1020.230) 112 The Metrosep A Supp 10 - 250/2.0 separation column is Applications based on a high-capacity polystyrene/divinylbenzene • Standard anions copolymer with a particle size of only 4.6 µm. This • Complex separation problems proven column concept optimized by Metrohm is • Difficult matrices characterized by its robust construction, great selectivity • Anions in concentrated acids and outstanding separating efficiency. The 2 mm • Aggressive matrices Metrosep A Supp 10 separation columns are packed with • IC-MS coupling the same material as the corresponding 4 mm separation columns. Temperature, flow and eluent composition can Technical information be used to modify the pro per ties of the column to Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene accommodate the current application directly. copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups The Metrosep A Supp 10 - 250/2.0 has a very high Column dimensions 250 x 2.0 mm capacity for a microbore column. It is suitable for samples Column body PEEK with high ionic strength, for complex separation tasks Standard flow 0.25 mL/min and for analyses in which great differences in Maximum flow 0.7 mL/min concentration between the individual components are Maximum pressure 25 MPa present. Thanks to its low flow, this microbore separation Particle size 4.6 µm column is ideal for IC-MS applications. Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 0...14 Temperature range 10...70 °C Capacity 24 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate eluent Sodium hydrogen carbonate 840 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium carbonate 1060 mg/2 L 5.0 mmol/L Column temperature 45 °C Ammonium sulfate eluent Ammonium sulfate 66.0 g/2 L 250 mmol/L Ammonium hydroxide 40 mL/2 L 100 mmol/L (c = 5.0 mol/L) Care Regeneration Organic contaminants: Column purification: Rinse with 70% methanol at 0.12 mL/min for 12 h. The Rinse with 50 mL of a 0.05 mol/L solution of Na EDTA at addition of 1% acetic acid may be useful. 4 a flow rate of 0.12 mL/min. Then rinse with 0.1 mol/L NaOH at 0.12 mL/min for 1 h. Storage In the eluent 113 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, standard, 45 °C, Conc. (mg/L) Ammonium sulfate eluent, PCR with 1,5-diphenylcarbazide 1 Chloride 5.00 4 Bromide 10.00 530 nm, spiked drinking water, 50 °C Conc. (µg/L) 2 Nitrite 5.00 5 Nitrate 10.00 1 Chromate 0.2 3 Phosphate 10.00 6 Sulfate 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 10 - 250/2.0 6.1020.230 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/2.0 6.1020.600 Metrosep A Supp 10 S-Guard/2.0 6.1020.610 Metrosep A Supp 16 - 100/2.0 (6.1031.210) 114 In the case of the microbore version of the Metrosep A Applications Supp 16 - 100, lower flows are applied through the • Standard anions smaller inner diameter. Eluent consumption is reduced • Universal applications drastically as a result. The dwell time of the ions in the • Rapid analysis (standard anions in 5 min) detector becomes longer and the sensitivity or the peak • IC-MS coupling area is increased accordingly (with the same sample amount). Microbore separation columns are used togeth-Technical information er with the MSM-LC (6.2844.000). The 2 mm Metrosep A Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene Supp 16 separation columns are packed with the same copolymer with quaternary material as the corresponding 4 mm separation columns. ammonium groups The short version of this column type enables extremely Column dimensions 100 x 2.0 mm rapid separations. Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.2 mL/min The column is well-suited to applications with a high ionic Maximum flow 0.6 mL/min load but which require only relatively low resolution. With Maximum pressure 16 MPa its low eluent flow, this column is particularly suitable for Particle size 4.6 µm IC-MS coupling. Organic modifier 0...10% pH range 0...14 Temperature range 10...70 °C Capacity 22 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate/hydroxide eluent Sodium carbonate 1590 mg/2 L 7.5 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium hydroxide 6.0 mL/2 L 0.75 mmol/L (c = 0.25 mol/L) Column temperature 45 °C Care Regeneration Eluent change Rinse the column overnight (12 h) with standard eluent When installing or changing to eluents which have an at low flow rate (0.1 mL/min). organic modifier to avoid high backpressure, adjust the flow in small increments from 0.1 mL/min within one Rinse the column with half of the standard flow in the hour to match standard conditions while maintaining the opposite direction for 2 h with 15 mmol/L Na CO and direction of flow. 2 3 then for 2 h with ultrapure water. Storage In the eluent 115 Chromatograms Carbonate/hydroxide eluent, standard, 40 °C, flow rate 0.6 mL/min. Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 2.00 5 Nitrate 10.0 2 Chloride 5.00 6 Sulfate 10.0 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Phosphate 10.0 4 Bromide 10.0 Carbonate/hydroxide eluent, standard, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate/hydroxide eluent, drinking water, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 2.00 5 Bromide 10.00 1 Chloride 9.2 3 Nitrate 9.7 2 Chloride 2.00 6 Nitrate 10.00 2 System peak – 4 Sulfate 10.2 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 4 System peak – 8 Phosphate 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 16 - 100/2.0 6.1031.210 Metrosep A Supp 16 Guard/2.0 6.1031.600 Metrosep A Supp 16 S-Guard/2.0 6.1031.610 Metrosep A Supp 16 - 150/2.0 (6.1031.220) 116 The microbore version of the Metrosep A Supp 16 - 150 Applications is well-suited to medium-capacity separation problems. • Standard anions Eluent consumption is drastically reduced as a result of the • Universal applications smaller inner diameter of this column type and the corre- • Difficult matrices with high ionic strength spondingly lower flows. As a result of the lower flows, the • Applications with gradient dwell time of the anions in the detector, and thus also the • IC-MS coupling peak areas with identical sample amounts, are increased. Microbore separation columns are used together with the Technical information MSM-LC (6.2844.000). The 2 mm Metrosep A Supp 16 Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene separation columns are packed with the same material as copolymer with quaternary the corresponding 4 mm separation columns. The medium ammonium groups version of this column type is used for universal applica-Column dimensions 150 x 2.0 mm tions. Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.2 mL/min The column is well-suited to applications with a high ionic Maximum flow 0.3 mL/min load but which do not require the highest resolution. With Maximum pressure 16 MPa its low eluent flow, this column is particularly suitable for Particle size 4.6 µm IC-MS coupling. Organic modifier 0...10% pH range 0...14 Temperature range 10...70 °C Capacity 31 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate/hydroxide eluent Sodium carbonate 1590 mg/2 L 7.5 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium hydroxide 6.0 mL/2 L 0.75 mmol/L (c = 0.25 mol/L) Column temperature 45 °C Carbonate eluent Sodium carbonate 763 mg/2 L 3.6 mmol/L Care Regeneration Eluent change Rinse the column overnight (12 h) with standard eluent When installing or changing to eluents which have an at low flow rate (0.1 mL/min). organic modifier to avoid high backpressure, adjust the flow in small increments from 0.1 mL/min to match Rinse the column with half of the standard flow in the standard conditions within one hour while maintaining opposite direction for 2 h with 15 mmol/L Na CO and the direction of flow. 2 3 then for 2 h with ultrapure water. Storage In the eluent 117 Chromatograms Carbonate eluent, salted meat, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Nitrite 0.019 2 Nitrate 0.204 Carbonate/hydroxide eluent, standard, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate/hydroxide eluent, drinking water, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 2.00 5 Bromide 10.00 1 Fluoride n.q. 4 Nitrate 9.7 2 Chloride 2.00 6 Nitrate 10.00 2 Chloride 9.2 5 Sulfate 10.2 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 3 System peak – 4 System peak – 8 Phosphate 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 16 - 150/2.0 6.1031.220 Metrosep A Supp 16 Guard/2.0 6.1031.600 Metrosep A Supp 16 S-Guard/2.0 6.1031.610 Metrosep A Supp 16 - 250/2.0 (6.1031.230) 118 The microbore version of the Metrosep A Supp 16 - 250 is Applications well suited to high-capacity separation problems. Lower • Standard anions flows are applied due to the smaller inner diameter of this • Universal applications column type. Eluent consumption is reduced drastically as • Azide/nitrate separation a result. The dwell time of the ions in the detector be - • Divalent organic acids besides standard anions comes longer and the sensitivity or the peak area is in - • Matrices with high ionic strength creased accordingly (with the same sample amount). • Applications with gradient Microbore separation columns are used with the MSM-LC • IC-MS coupling (6.2844.000). The 2 mm Metrosep A Supp 16 separation columns are packed with the same material as the corre-Technical information sponding 4 mm separation columns. The separation Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene column is based on a surface-functionalized polystyrene/ copolymer with quaternary divinylbenzene copolymer. The functional groups are ammonium groups bonded covalently. The morphology of the anion ex - Column dimensions 250 x 2.0 mm changer results in unique selectivity. The high-capacity Column body PEEK Metrosep A Supp 16 - 250/2.0 is used for solving complex Standard flow 0.2 mL/min problems. Maximum flow 0.3 mL/min Maximum pressure 16 MPa The Metrosep A Supp 16 - 250/2.0 is characterized by Particle size 4.6 µm outstanding resolution and solves the most difficult separa-Organic modifier 0...10% tion problems. With its low eluent flow, this column is pH range 0...14 particularly suitable for IC-MS coupling. Temperature range 10...70 °C Capacity 51 µmol (Cl–) Eluent Carbonate/hydroxide eluent Sodium carbonate 1590 mg/2 L 7.5 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium hydroxide 6.0 mL/2 L 0.75 mmol/L (c = 0.25 mol/L) Column temperature 45 °C Care Regeneration Eluent change Rinse the column overnight (12 h) with standard eluent When installing or changing to eluents which have an at low flow rate (0.1 mL/min). organic modifier to avoid high backpressure, adjust the flow in small increments from 0.1 mL/min to match Rinse the column with half of the standard flow in the standard conditions within one hour while maintaining opposite direction for 2 h with 15 mmol/L Na CO and the direction of flow. 2 3 then for 2 h with ultrapure water. Storage In the eluent 119 Chromatograms Carbonate/hydroxide eluent, standard, 65 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 2.0 9 Bromide 10.0 2 Glycolate 10.0 10 Nitrate 10.0 3 Formate 10.0 11 Malate 10.0 4 Lactate 10.0 12 Succinate 10.0 5 Chloride 5.0 13 Malonate 10.0 6 MSA 10.0 14 Sulfate 10.0 7 Nitrite 5.0 15 Phosphate 10.0 8 System peak – 16 Maleate 10.0 Carbonate/hydroxide eluent, standard, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) Carbonate/hydroxide eluent, Conc. (mg/L) 1 Fluoride 2.00 5 Bromide 10.00 drinking water, 45 °C 2 Chloride 2.00 6 Nitrate 10.00 1 Fluoride n.q. 4 Nitrate 9.7 3 Nitrite 5.00 7 Sulfate 10.00 2 Chloride 9.2 5 Sulfate 10.2 4 System peak – 8 Phosphate 10.00 3 System peak – Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 16 - 250/2.0 6.1031.230 Metrosep A Supp 16 Guard/2.0 6.1031.600 Metrosep A Supp 16 S-Guard/2.0 6.1031.610 120 Separation columns 121 IC separation columns for the determination of organic acids – ion-exclusion chromatography «Inverse suppression» – dissociation desired! The use of the Metrohm «MSM» suppressor module is recommended to improve sensitivity in the detection of organic acids which are only weakly dissociated. A non-conventional approach is used: The suppressor is charged with lithium ions instead of hydrogen ions. As a result, it is possible to transfer the protonated and thus undis sociated acids into their nearly completely dissociated salts. This increases sensitivity in the conductivity detector considerably. The construction is the same as with chemical suppression, except that the suppressor is regenerated with lithium chloride instead of with sulfuric acid. The «MSM» is used as a post-column reactor between the ion-exclusion column and the conductivity detector. Hamilton PRP-X300 - 250/4.0 (6.1005.030) 122 The Hamilton-PRP-X300 ion-exclusion column is a cation-Applications exchanger column with low capacity. The combination of • Glycolic acid, monochloroacetic acid a polystyrene/divinylbenzene copolymer with sulfonic • Simple matrices acid groups as ion exchanger is ideal for the solution of • Simple separation problems simple separation problems. The column is characterized • Formate determination by the possibility of determining the salts of organic acids, in particular the very sensitive determination of Technical information formate. Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene copolymer with sulfonic acid groups Column dimensions 250 x 4.0 mm Column body Stainless steel Standard flow 1.0 mL/min Maximum flow 8.0 mL/min Maximum pressure 34 MPa Particle size 7 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 1...13 Temperature range 5...60 °C Capacity 19 µmol (K+) Eluents Sulfuric acid eluent Sulfuric acid (c = 0.1 mol/L) 10 mL/2 L 0.5 mmol/L Care Regeneration Storage Divalent cations remain on the column and form com- For short periods (days) in the eluent, for longer periods plexes with citrate that falsify the citrate peak. Injection (weeks) in methanol/water (1:4) of 100 µL 0.1 mol/L Na H EDTA. 2 2 Rinse the column with 0.01 mol/L H SO with 20% 2 4 methanol at a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min for 6 h. 123 Chromatogram Sulfuric acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Tartrate 10.00 3 Lactate 20.00 2 Formate 10.00 4 Acetate 30.00 Ordering information Hamilton PRP-X300 - 250/4.0 6.1005.030 Metrosep RP 2 Guard/3.5 6.1011.030 Replacement filters for RP 2 Guard/3.5 (10 pcs.) 6.1011.130 Metrosep RP 3 Guard HC/4.0 6.1011.040 Metrosep Organic Acids - 100/7.8 (6.1005.210) 124 The separation column for the determination of organic Applications acids and weak mineral acids. The low capacity in com- • Organic acids: Citrate, tartrate, malate, ascorbate, parison with the Metrosep Organic Acids - 250/7.8 succinate (6.1005.200) allows the rapid separation of organic • Short-chain fatty acids: Formate, acetate, acids. This column is suitable primarily for small and propionate, butyrate, etc. medium concentrations in uncomplicated sample • F–, CO 2– 3 ma trices. • Simple matrices • Simple separation problems Technical information Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene copolymer with sulfonic acid groups Column dimensions 100 x 7.8 mm Column body Stainless steel Standard flow 0.5 mL/min Maximum flow 0.6 mL/min Maximum pressure 7 MPa Particle size 9 µm Organic modifier 0...20% pH range 1...13 Temperature range 5...90 °C Eluent Sulfuric acid eluent Sulfuric acid (c = 2 mol/L) 0.5 mL/2 L 0.5 mmol/L (standard eluent) Acetone 300 mL/2 L 15% Oxalic acid eluent Oxalic acid 45 mg/2 L 0.25 mmol/L Care Regeneration Organic contaminants: Column purification: Rinse the column in the opposite Rinse the column in the opposite direction with approx. direction with 20% acetonitrile in 0.01 mol/L H SO at a 30 mL 0.01 mol/L H SO /acetonitrile (80/20) at a flow 2 4 2 4 flow rate of 0.1 mL/min for 4 hours at 65 °C. rate of 0.1 mL/min. Contaminations with metals: Storage If retention times are shortened: Rinse the column in the For short periods (days) in the eluent, for longer periods opposite direction with approx. 30 mL 0.1 mol/L H SO (weeks) in ultrapure water. The column can be stored in 2 4 at a flow rate of 0.1 mL/min. a refrigerator at no colder than +4 °C. 125 Chromatograms Sulfuric acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Oxalic acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Tartrate 25.0 5 Formate 20.0 1 Acetate 10.0 5 Caproate 10.0 2 Malate 50.0 6 Acetate 100.0 2 Propionate 10.0 6 Enantate 10.0 3 Succinate 100.0 7 System peak – 3 Butyrate 10.0 7 Octanate 10.0 4 Lactate 50.0 4 Valerate 10.0 Ordering information Metrosep Organic Acids - 100/7.8 6.1005.210 Metrosep Organic Acids Guard/4.6 6.1005.250 Metrosep Organic Acids - 250/7.8 (6.1005.200) 126 The Metrosep Organic Acids - 250/7.8 is is a polymer- Applications based cation-exchanger column. It is the high-perfor- • Organic acids: Citrate, tartrate, malate, ascorbate, mance column for the determination of organic acids succinate and for the solution of difficult and complex separation • Short-chain fatty acids: Formate, acetate, propio-problems. In addition, carbonate (with inverse suppres-nate, butyrate, etc. sion), fluoride (hydrofluoric acid), and phosphate (phos- • F–, PO 3–, CO 2– 4 3 phoric acid) can be determined along with organic acids. • Difficult matrices In comparison with the Hamilton PRP-X300 - 250/4.0, • Difficult separation problems the Metrosep Organic Acids column - 250/7.8 has greater capacity and enhanced selectivity. Technical information Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene copolymer with sulfonic acid groups Column dimensions 250 x 7.8 mm Column body Stainless steel Standard flow 0.5 mL/min Maximum flow 0.6 mL/min Maximum pressure 7 MPa Particle size 9 µm Organic modifier 0...20% pH range 1...13 Temperature range 5...90 °C Eluent Sulfuric acid eluent Sulfuric acid (c = 2 mol/L) 0.5 mL/2 L 0.5 mmol/L (standard eluent) Acetone 300 mL/2 L 15% Care Regeneration Organic contaminants: Column purification: Rinse the column in the opposite Rinse the column in the opposite direction with approx. direction with 20% acetonitrile in 0.01 mol/L H SO at a 30 mL 0.01 mol/L H SO /acetonitrile (80/20) at a flow 2 4 2 4 flow rate of 0.1 mL/min for 4 hours at 65 °C. rate of 0.1 mL/min. Contaminations with metals: Storage If retention times are shortened: Rinse the column in the For short periods (days) in the eluent, for longer periods opposite direction with approx. 30 mL 0.1 mol/L H SO (weeks) in ultrapure water. The column can be stored in 2 4 at a flow rate of 0.1 mL/min. a refrigerator at no colder than +4 °C. 127 Chromatograms Sulfuric acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) with inverse suppression 1 Tartrate 10.00 5 Formate 5.00 2 Malate 10.00 6 Acetate 10.00 3 Succinate 10.00 7 System peak – 4 Lactate 10.00 Sulfuric acid eluent, apple juice Conc. (mg/L) Sulfuric acid eluent, mineral water Conc. (mg/L) 1 Citrate 63.41 4 unknown – 1 Carbonate 304 2 Tartrate 48.14 5 Lactate 29.86 3 Malate 7281.28 6 System peak – Ordering information Metrosep Organic Acids - 250/7.8 6.1005.200 Metrosep Organic Acids Guard/4.6 6.1005.250 128 Separation columns 129 IC carbohydrate-separation columns – anion- exchange chromatography applying pulsed amperometric detection (PAD) Metrosep Carb 2 - 100/4.0 (6.1090.410) 130 The Metrosep Carb 2 - 100/4.0 IC column is particularly Applications suitable for the determination of carbohydrates using • Monosaccharides alkaline eluents and pulsed amperometric detection. The • Disaccharides high-capacity anion-exchange column is based on a • Sugar alcohols styrene/divinylbenzene copolymer. It is stable in the • Oligosaccharides range of pH = 0...14 and provides separation of glucose, • Simple separation problems fructose, sucrose and lactose. It is also suitable for the • Very rapid separations analysis of some sugar alcohols and oligosaccharides. Short analysis times can be achieved on the 100 mm Technical information version of the Metrosep Carb 2 separation column. Substrate Styrene/divinylbenzene copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 100 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.8 mL/min Maximum flow 1.6 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa Particle size 5.0 µm Organic modifier In the eluent: 0...50 % acetonitrile or methanol In the sample: 0...100 % acetone, acetonitrile or methanol pH range 0...14 Temperature range 20...60 °C Eluent Hydroxide/acetate eluent Sodium hydroxide (c = 20 mol/L) 10 mL/2 L 100 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium acetate 1640.7 mg/2 L 10 mmol/L Note 1. Use a flow ramp to establish the standard flow in the Inorganic contamination: column within 5 min. Rinse the column in the flow direction with a mixture of 2. Rinse the column with the desired eluent for 2 h at 100 mmol/L sodium hydroxide and 500 mmol/L sodium 30 °C. acetate at a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min for at least 3 h. Care After regeneration, rinse the column with standard Organic contamination: eluent for at least 3 h. Rinse the column in the flow direction with standard eluent in 50% acetonitrile at a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min for Storage 3 h. In the standard eluent 131 Chromatograms Hydroxide/acetate eluent, standard, 30 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Inositol 2.5 4 Fructose 5.0 2 Arabitol 5.0 5 Sucrose 15.0 3 Glucose 5.0 Hydroxide/acetate eluent, whole milk chocolate, Conc. (g/kg) Hydroxide/acetate eluent, standard, 60 mg/L in 10% acetone, 30 °C comparison of the various column lengths Conc. (mg/L) 1 Lactose 101.6 2 Sucrose 400.7 1 Inositol 2.5 5 Xylose 5.0 2 Arabitol 5.0 6 Fructose 5.0 3 Sorbitol 5.0 7 Lactose 10.0 4 Glucose 5.0 8 Sucrose 15.0 Ordering information Metrosep Carb 2 - 100/4.0 6.1090.410 Metrosep Carb 2 Guard/4.0 6.1090.500 Metrosep Carb 2 S-Guard/4.0 6.1090.510 Metrosep Carb 2 - 150/4.0 (6.1090.420) 132 The Metrosep Carb 2 - 150/4.0 IC column is particularly Applications suitable for the determination of carbohydrates using • Monosaccharides alkaline eluents and pulsed amperometric detection. The • Disaccharides ainon-exchange column is based on a styrene/ • Sugar alcohols divinylbenzene copolymer. It is stable in the range of • Anhydrosugars pH = 0...14 and provides separation of monosaccharides • Oligosaccharides and disaccharides. It is also suitable for the analysis of • Rapid separations sugar alcohols, anhydrous sugars, oligosaccharides, etc. The column capacity has been optimized to enable the Technical information combination of rapid separations and excellent separation Substrate Styrene/divinylbenzene properties. copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 150 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.5 mL/min Maximum flow 1.2 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa Particle size 5.0 µm Organic modifier In the eluent: 0...50 % acetonitrile or methanol In the sample: 0...100 % acetone, acetonitrile or methanol pH range 0...14 Temperature range 20...60 °C Eluent Hydroxide/acetate eluent Sodium hydroxide (c = 20 mol/L) 10 mL/2 L 100 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium acetate 1640.7 mg/2 L 10 mmol/L Hydroxide eluent Sodium hydroxide (c = 20 mol/L) 1.0 mL/2 L 20 mmol/L Hydroxide/acetate eluent Sodium hydroxide (c = 20 mol/L) 0.5 mL/2 L 5 mmol/L (modified) Sodium acetate 328.1 mg/2 L 2 mmol/L Hydroxide eluent Sodium hydroxide (c = 20 mol/L) 5.0 mL/2 L 100 mmol/L (modified) Note 1. Use a flow ramp to establish the standard flow in the Inorganic contamination: column within 5 min. Rinse the column in the flow direction with a mixture of 2. Rinse the column for 2 h at 30 °C with the desired 100 mmol/L sodium hydroxide and 500 mmol/L sodium eluent. acetate at a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min for at least 5 h. Care After regeneration, rinse the column with standard Organic contamination: eluent for at least 5 h. Rinse the column in the flow direction with standard eluent in 50% acetonitrile at a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min for Storage 3 h. In the standard eluent Chromatograms 133 Hydroxide eluent, (modified), ASTM D 7591, Conc. (mg/kg) free and total glycerin in biodiesel 1 Free glycerin 6.52 2 Total glycerin 98.15 Hydroxide/acetate eluent, standard, 30 °C Conc. (mg/L) Hydroxide eluent, standard, anhydrosugars Conc. (mg/L) 1 Inositol 2.5 5 Xylose 5.0 in aerosols, 45 °C 2 Arabitol 5.0 6 Fructose 5.0 1 Inositol 0.6 7 Mannosan 3.2 3 Sorbitol 5.0 7 Lactose 10.0 2 Erythritol 0.6 8 Galactosan 3.2 4 Glucose 5.0 8 Sucrose 15.0 3 Arabitol 1.3 9 Rhamnose 3.2 4 Sorbitol 1.3 10 Glucose 3.2 5 Mannitol 1.3 11 Xylose 3.2 6 Levoglucosan 3.2 12 Sucrose 3.2 Hydroxide/acetate eluent, (mod.), standard, 35 °C Hydroxide/acetate eluent, (mod.), lactose-free milk, diluted Conc. (mg/L) 1 : 100, Inline Dialysis spiked with 100 mg/L Lactose, 28 °C 1 Galactose 5.0 4 N-acetyl- Conc. (mg/L) 2 Mannose 5.0 galactosamine 20.0 1 Galactose n.q. 3 Lactose 100.0 3 N-acetyl- 2 Glucose n.q. glucosamine 20.0 Ordering information Metrosep Carb 2 - 150/4.0 6.1090.420 Metrosep Carb 2 Guard/4.0 6.1090.500 Metrosep Carb 2 S-Guard/4.0 6.1090.510 Metrosep Carb 2 - 250/4.0 (6.1090.430) 134 The Metrosep Carb 2 - 250/4.0 IC column is particularly Applications suitable for the determination of carbohydrates using • Monosaccharides alkaline eluents and pulsed amperometric detection. The • Disaccharides high-capacity anion-exchange column is based on a • Sugar alcohols styrene/divinylbenzene copolymer. It is stable in the • Anhydrosugars range of pH = 0...14 and provides separation of mono- • Difficult matrices saccharides and disaccharides. It is also suitable for the • Complex separations analysis of sugar alcohols, anhydrosugars, amino sugars, etc. The 250 mm version of the Metrosep Carb 2 Technical information separation column is optimized for complex separations. Substrate Styrene/divinylbenzene copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 250 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.5 mL/min Maximum flow 0.8 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa Particle size 5.0 µm Organic modifier In the eluent: 0...50 % acetonitrile or methanol In the sample: 0...100 % acetone, acetonitrile or methanol pH range 0...14 Temperature range 20...60 °C Eluent Hydroxide/acetate eluent Sodium hydroxide (c = 20 mol/L) 10 mL/2 L 100 mmol/L (standard eluent) Sodium acetate 1640.7 mg/2 L 10 mmol/L Hydroxide/acetate eluent Sodium hydroxide (c = 20 mol/L) 0.5 mL/2 L 5 mmol/L (modified) Sodium acetate 328.1 mg/2 L 2 mmol/L Note 1. Use a flow ramp to establish the standard flow in the Inorganic contamination: column within 5 min. Rinse the column in the flow direction with a mixture of 2. Rinse the column with the desired eluent for 2 h at 100 mmol/L sodium hydroxide and 500 mmol/L sodium 30 °C. acetate at a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min for at least 7 h. Care After regeneration, rinse the column with standard Organic contamination: eluent for at least 7 h. Rinse the column in the flow direction with standard eluent in 50% acetonitrile at a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min Storage for 7 h. In the standard eluent 135 Chromatograms Hydroxide/acetate eluent, standard, 30 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Inositol 2.5 5 Xylose 5.0 2 Arabitol 5.0 6 Fructose 5.0 3 Sorbitol 5.0 7 Lactose 10.0 4 Glucose 5.0 8 Sucrose 15.0 Hydroxide/acetate eluent, (mod.), Conc. (mg/L) Hydroxide/acetate eluent, orange juice Conc. (g/L) standard, 40 °C 1 Inositol 1.5 5 Fructose 23.2 1 Inositol 0.5 9 Fucose 2.0 2 Glucose 20.6 6 Sucrose 42.5 2 Xylitol 0.5 10 Sucrose 2.0 3 Sorbitol 0.5 11 Galactose 2.0 4 Mannitol 0.5 12 Glucose 2.0 5 Lactitol 0.5 13 Mannose 2.0 6 Levoglucosan 2.0 14 Sorbose 5.0 7 Mannosan 2.0 15 Fructose 5.0 8 Galactosan 2.0 16 Lactose 5.0 Ordering information Metrosep Carb 2 - 250/4.0 6.1090.430 Metrosep Carb 2 Guard/4.0 6.1090.500 Metrosep Carb 2 S-Guard/4.0 6.1090.510 Hamilton RCX-30 - 150/4.6 (6.1018.010) 136 The Hamilton RCX-30 - 150/4.6 is a column for the sepa-Applications ration of monosaccharides, disaccharides, oligosaccha- • Monosaccharides rides, and sugar alcohols. It is an anion-exchange column • Disaccharides based on polystyrene/divinylbenzene resin. The RCX-30 • Oligosaccharides - 150/4.6 can be used for universal applications. • Sugar alcohols • Simple separation problems The Hamilton RCX-30 - 150/4.6 separation column fea- • Rapid separations tures an outstanding separation of fructose and lactose. The column also offers the advantage that flows of up to Technical information 2 mL/min can be used in order to accelerate the chroma-Substrate Styrene/divinylbenzene tography. The column is used both for the rapid separa-copolymer with quaternary tion of small carbo hydrates and for the separation of ammonium groups oligo sac charides. Column dimensions 150 x 4.6 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 1.0 mL/min Maximum flow 2.0 mL/min Maximum pressure 34 MPa Particle size 7 µm pH range 1...13 (T>35 °C max. pH 8) Temperature range 20...60 °C Eluent Hydroxide eluent Sodium hydroxide (c = 20 mol/L) 15 mL/2 L 150 mmol/L Column temperature 32 °C Hydroxide eluent Sodium hydroxide (c = 20 mol/L) 20 mL/2 L 200 mmol/L (modified) Column temperature 32 °C Care Regeneration Storage Rinse the column with 150 mL 0.1 mol/L NaOH at a flow In ultrapure water with 1 mmol/L sodium azide rate of 1 mL/min. 137 Chromatograms Hydroxide eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Hydroxide eluent, modified, glycerin 1 Inositol 5.00 6 Glucose 10.00 in fermentation solution Conc. (mg/L) 2 Arabitol 10.00 7 Fructose 10.00 1 Glycerin 20.31 4 Trehalose n.q. 3 Sorbitol 10.00 8 Sucrose 10.00 2 Arabitol n.q. 5 Glucose n.q. 4 Fucose 10.00 9 Lactose 10.00 3 Sorbitol n.q. 5 Arabinose 10.00 Ordering information Hamilton RCX-30 - 150/4.6 6.1018.010 Metrosep RP 2 Guard/3.5 6.1011.030 Replacement filters for RP 2 Guard/3.5 (10 pcs.) 6.1011.130 Metrosep RP 3 Guard HC/4.0 6.1011.040 Hamilton RCX-30 - 250/4.6 (6.1018.000) 138 The Hamilton RCX-30 - 250/4.6 is a column for the sepa-Applications ration of monosaccharides, disaccharides, and sugar • Monosaccharides alco hols. It is an anion-exchange column based on poly- • Disaccharides styrene/divinylbenzene resin. The RCX-30 - 250/4.6 can • Sugar alcohols be used for universal applications. • Difficult separation problems • Difficult matrices The Hamilton RCX-30 - 250/4.6 separation column excels in an outstanding separation of fructose and lactose. The Technical information column also offers the advantage that flows of up to 2 Substrate Styrene/divinylbenzene mL/min can be used in order to accelerate the chroma- copolymer with quaternary tography. The long version of the column (250 mm) is ammonium groups preferred for the determination of small carbohydrates Column dimensions 250 x 4.6 mm (monosaccharides, disaccharides, and sugar alcohols). Column body PEEK Standard flow 1.0 mL/min Maximum flow 2.0 mL/min Maximum pressure 34 MPa Particle size 7 µm pH range 1...13 (T>35 °C max. pH 8) Temperature range 20...60 °C Eluent Hydroxide eluent Sodium hydroxide (c = 20 mol/L) 15 mL/2 L 150 mmol/L (standard eluent) Column temperature 32 °C Care Regeneration Storage Rinse the column with 150 mL 0.1 mol/L NaOH at a flow In ultrapure water with 1 mmol/L sodium azide rate of 1 mL/min. 139 Chromatograms Hydroxide eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Hydroxide eluent, banana 1.1 g/2 L Conc. (mg/g) 1 Inositol 5.00 6 Glucose 10.00 1 Glucose 15 3 Sucrose 71 2 Arabitol 10.00 7 Fructose 10.00 2 Fructose 11 3 Sorbitol 10.00 8 Lactose 10.00 4 Fucose 10.00 9 Sucrose 10.00 5 Arabinose 10.00 Ordering information Hamilton RCX-30 - 250/4.6 6.1018.000 Metrosep RP 2 Guard/3.5 6.1011.030 Replacement filters for RP 2 Guard/3.5 (10 pcs.) 6.1011.130 Metrosep RP 3 Guard HC/4.0 6.1011.040 140 Separation columns 141 Microbore IC carbohydrate-separation columns for lower eluent consumption and greater sensitivity Metrosep Carb 2 - 100/2.0 (6.01090.210) 142 The Metrosep Carb 2 - 100/2.0 IC column is the short Applications microbore version of the Metrosep Carb 2 columns and • Monosaccharides is particularly suitable for the determination of carbohy- • Disaccharides drates using alkaline eluents and pulsed amperometric • Sugar alcohols detection. The high-capacity anion exchanger column is • Oligosaccharides based on a styrene-divinylbenzene copolymer. It is stable • Simple separation problems in the range of pH = 0...14 and provides separation of • Very rapid separations glucose, fructose and sucrose. It is also suitable for the • Anions in sea water analysis of some sugar alcohols and oligosaccharides. • IC-MS Short analysis times can be achieved on the 100 mm version of the Metrosep Carb 2 separation column. Technical information Substrate Polystyrene-divinylbenzene With its low eluent flow, this column is particularly suit-copolymer with quaternary able for IC-MS coupling. ammonium groups Column dimensions 100 x 2.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.2 mL/min Maximum flow 0.7 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa Particle size 5.0 µm Organic modifier In the eluent: 0...50 % acetonitrile or methanol In the sample: 0...100 % acetone, acetonitrile or methanol pH range 0...14 Temperature range 20...60 °C Eluents Hydroxide/acetate eluent Sodium hydroxide 10 mL/2 L 100 mmol/L (standard eluent) (c = 20 mol/L) Sodium acetate 1,640.7 mg/2 L 10 mmol/L Sodium chloride eluent Sodium chloride 20 g/2 L 10 g/L Ammonium nitrate eluent Ammonium nitrate 16.0 g/2 L 100 mmol/L Ammonium hydroxide pH = 9.0 Care Regeneration Inorganic contamination: Note: Rinse the column in the flow direction with a mixture of 1. Use a flow ramp to establish the standard flow in the 100 mmol/L sodium hydroxide and 500 mmol/L sodium column within 5 min. acetate at a flow rate of 0.13 mL/min for at least 7 h. 2. Rinse the column with the desired eluent for 2 h at 30 °C. After regeneration, rinse the column with standard eluent for at least 7 h. Organic contamination: Rinse the column in the flow direction with 25 mL of Storage solution (standard eluent in 50% acetonitrile) at a flow In the standard eluent rate of 0.13 mL/min. 143 Chromatograms Hydroxide/acetate eluent, standard, 30 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Inositol 2.5 4 Fructose 5.0 2 Arabitol 5.0 5 Sucrose 15.0 3 Glucose 5.0 Sodium chloride eluent, modified, Conc. (mg/L) Ammonium nitrate eluent, standard, Conc. (µg/L) artificial seawater, UV/VIS, 30 °C IC-ICP/MS 1 Nitrite 0.08 3 Nitrate 0.34 1 Cr(III) 0.6, 0.8, 1.0, 4.0 2 Cr(VI) 0.2, 0.4, 1.0 2 Bromide 0.69 Ordering information Metrosep Carb 2 - 100/2.0 6.01090.210 Metrosep Carb 2 Guard/2.0 6.01090.600 Metrosep Carb 2 S-Guard/2.0 6.01090.610 Metrosep Carb 2 - 150/2.0 (6.01090.220) 144 The microbore version of the Metrosep Carb 2 - 150/2.0 Applications IC column is particularly suitable for the determination of • Monosaccharides carbohydrates using alkaline eluents and pulsed ampero- • Disaccharides metric detection. The anion exchanger column is based • Sugar alcohols on a styrene-divinylbenzene copolymer. It is stable in the • Oligosaccharides range of pH = 0...14 and provides separation of mono- • Anhydrous sugars saccharides and disaccharides. It is also suitable for the • Rapid separations analysis of sugar alcohols, anhydrous sugars, oligosac- • IC-MS charides, etc. The column capacity has been optimized to enable the combination of rapid separations and excel-Technical information lent separation properties. Substrate Polystyrene-divinylbenzene copolymer with quaternary Thanks to its low eluent consumption, it is particularly ammonium groups suitable for IC-MS coupling. Column dimensions 150 x 2.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.13 mL/min Maximum flow 0.45 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa Particle size 5.0 µm Organic modifier In the eluent: 0...50 % acetonitrile or methanol In the sample: 0...100 % acetone, acetonitrile or methanol pH range 0...14 Temperature range 20...60 °C Eluents Hydroxide/acetate eluent Sodium hydroxide 10 mL/2 L 100 mmol/L (standard eluent) (c = 20 mol/L) Sodium acetate 1,640.7 mg/2 L 10 mmol/L Hydroxide/acetate eluent Sodium hydroxide 0.5 mL/2 L 5 mmol/L (modified) (c = 20 mol/L) Sodium acetate 328.1 mg/2 L 2 mmol/L Care Regeneration Inorganic contamination: Note: Rinse the column in the flow direction with a mixture of 1. Use a flow ramp to establish the standard flow in the 100 mmol/L sodium hydroxide and 500 mmol/L sodium column within 5 min. acetate at a flow rate of 0.13 mL/min for at least 7 h. 2. Rinse the column with the desired eluent for 2 h at 30 °C. After regeneration, rinse the column with standard eluent for at least 7 h. Organic contamination: Rinse the column in the flow direction with 25 mL of Storage solution (standard eluent in 50% acetonitrile) at a flow In the standard eluent rate of 0.13 mL/min. 145 Chromatograms Hydroxide/acetate eluent, (mod.), yoghurt, 1:1000 diluted, 40 °C Conc. (g/L) 1 Sucrose 64.5 4 Fructose 15.2 2 Galactose 4.2 5 Lactose 30.6 3 Glucose 10.0 Hydroxide/acetate eluent, standard, 30 °C Conc. (mg/L) Hydroxide/acetate eluent, (mod.), apple juice, 1 Inositol 2.5 5 Xylose 5.0 1:1000 diluted, 40 °C Conc. (g/L) 2 Arabitol 5.0 6 Fructose 5.0 1 Sucrose 5.0 3 unknown – 3 Sorbitol 5.0 7 Lactose 10.0 2 Glucose 26.8 4 Fructose 59.4 4 Glucose 5.0 8 Sucrose 15.0 Ordering information Metrosep Carb 2 - 150/2.0 6.01090.220 Metrosep Carb 2 Guard/2.0 6.01090.600 Metrosep Carb 2 S-Guard/2.0 6.01090.610 Metrosep Carb 2 - 250/2.0 (6.01090.230) 146 The Metrosep Carb 2 - 250/2.0 IC column is particularly Applications suitable for the determination of carbohydrates using • Monosaccharides alkaline eluents and pulsed amperometric detection. The • Disaccharides high-capacity anion exchanger column is based on a • Sugar alcohols styrol-divinylbenzene copolymer. It is stable in the range • Anhydrous sugars of pH = 0...14 and provides separation of monosaccha- • Oligosaccharides rides and disaccharides. It is also suitable for the analysis • Difficult matrices of sugar alcohols, anhydrous sugars, amino sugars, etc. • Complex separations The 250 mm microbore version of the Metrosep Carb 2 • IC-MS separation column is optimized for complex separations. Technical information Thanks to its low eluent consumption, it is particularly Substrate Polystyrene-divinylbenzene suitable for IC-MS coupling. copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 250 x 2.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.13 mL/min Maximum flow 0.30 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa Particle size 5.0 µm Organic modifier In the eluent: 0...50 % acetonitrile or methanol In the sample: 0...100 % acetone, acetonitrile or methanol pH range 0...14 Temperature range 20...60 °C Eluents Hydroxide/acetate eluent Sodium hydroxide 10 mL/2 L 100 mmol/L (standard eluent) (c = 20 mol/L) Sodium acetate 1,640.7 mg/2 L 10 mmol/L Hydroxid eluent Sodium hydroxide 1.0 mL/2 L 10 mmol/L Care Regeneration Inorganic contamination: Note: Rinse the column in the flow direction with a mixture of 1. Use a flow ramp to establish the standard flow in the 100 mmol/L sodium hydroxide and 500 mmol/L sodium column within 5 min. acetate at a flow rate of 0.13 mL/min for at least 7 h. 2. Rinse the column with the desired eluent for 2 h at 30 °C. After regeneration, rinse the column with standard eluent for at least 7 h. Organic contamination: Rinse the column in the flow direction with 25 mL of Storage solution (standard eluent in 50% acetonitrile) at a flow In the standard eluent rate of 0.13 mL/min. 147 Chromatograms Hydroxide/acetate, 30 °C Conc. (mg/L) Hydroxide eluent, Anhydrosugars, 45 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Inositol 2.5 5 Xylose 5.0 1 Inositol 0.25 7 Galactosan 1.25 2 Arabitol 5.0 6 Fructose 5.0 2 Arabitol 0.50 8 Rhamnose 2.50 3 Sorbitol 5.0 7 Lactose 10.0 3 Sorbitol 0.50 9 Glucose 3.75 4 Glucose 5.0 8 Sucrose 15.0 4 Mannitol 0.50 10 Xylose 3.75 5 Levoglucosan 1.25 11 Sucrose 3.75 6 Mannosan 1.25 Ordering information Metrosep Carb 2 - 250/2.0 6.01090.230 Metrosep Carb 2 Guard/2.0 6.01090.600 Metrosep Carb 2 S-Guard/2.0 6.01090.610 148 Separation columns 149 IC amino acid-separation column with optical detection (VIS) after post-column reaction Metrosep Amino Acids 1 - 100/4.0 (6.4001.410) 150 The Metrosep Amino Acids 1 - 100/4.0 is the standard Applications separation column for amino acids. The column is based • Amino acids on a sulfonated polystyrene-divinylbenzene material. The • Ammonium determination of amino acids is accomplished by means of photometric detection following a post-column reac-Technical information tion with ninhydrin. Substrate Sulfonated polystyrene- divinylbenzene copolymer, The Metrosep Amino Acids 1 - 100/4.0 permits the sepa-lithium form ration of up to 44 amino acids in research and routine Column dimensions 100 x 4.0 mm applications including all naturally occurring amino acids. Column body Stainless steel Standard flow 0.4 mL/min Maximum flow 0.5 mL/min Maximum pressure 10 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier 0... 5%, 10% acetonitrile pH range 1...14 Temperature range 30...90 °C Capacity 2.9 mmol (K+) Eluents Citrate/phenol eluent A: Lithium citrate 17.8 g/2 L 42.6 mmol/L Gradient Phenol 2.0 g/2L 10.6 mmol/L HCl pH = 2.8 B: Lithium citrate 17.8 g/2L 42.6 mmol/L Lithium chloride 86.0 g/2L 1.0 mol/L Phenol 2.0 g/2L 10.6 mmol/L HCl pH = 4.2 Column temperature 50 °C PCR reagents Ninhydrin Ninhydrin 4.0 g/200 mL 0.11 mol/L Hydrindantin 0.16 g/200 mL 2.5 mmol/L Dimethyl sulfoxide 100 mL Lithium acetate buffer 100 mL (2 mol/L, pH = 5.2 with acetic acid) Reactor temperature 120 °C Care Regeneration With contaminations caused by organic components: In the event of temporary loss of column performance: Rinse the column with the following solutions in sequence • Apply fresh eluent, rinse the instrument and column (0.2 mL/min, 65 °C): for 1 h at 0.20 mL/min at 65 °C • 30 min ultrapure water • 60 min 20% acetonitrile/water For minor contaminations: • 60 min ultrapure water to completely remove the • 120 min 0.3 moI/L lithium hydroxide with 0.25 g/L acetonitrile EDTA (0.20 mL/min, 90 °C) Storage Short-term: Storage in eluent with 2.5% acetonitrile Long-term: Storage in 0.3 moI/L lithium hydroxide with 5% acetonitrile. 151 Chromatogram Citrate/phenol eluent, standard ( = 570 nm) y Conc. (mmol/L) 1 L-aspartic acid 2.5 10 L-methionine 2.5 2 L-serine 2.5 11 L-isoleucine 2.5 3 L-threonine 2.5 12 L-leucine 2.5 4 L-glutamic acid 2.5 13 L-tyrosine 2.5 5 L-proline 2.5 14 L-phenylalanine 2.5 6 Glycine 2.5 15 Ammonium 2.5 7 L-alanine 2.5 16 L-lysine 2.5 8 L-valine 2.5 17 L-histidine 2.5 9 L-cystine 1.25 18 L-arginine 2.5 Ordering information Metrosep Amino Acids 1 - 100/4.0 6.4001.410 Metrosep RP 2 Guard/3.5 6.1011.030 Replacement filters for RP 2 Guard/3.5 (10 pcs.) 6.1011.130 Metrosep RP 3 Guard HC/4.0 6.1011.040 152 Separation columns 153 IC cation-separation columns for analyses without chemical suppression Nucleosil 5SA - 125/4.0 (6.1007.000) 154 The Nucleosil 5SA IC cation column uses sulfonic acid Applications groups for the separation of cations. With eluents con- • Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, Fe2+, Co2+, Ni2+, Cd2+, Zn2+, Mn2+ taining organic acids and ethylenediamine, this column • Mg2+, Ca2+ in addition to a high amount of sodium separates divalent cations such as magnesium and calcium as well as some of the transition metal elements (e.g. Technical information nickel, zinc, cobalt, manganese). The Nucleosil 5SA - Substrate Spherical silica gel with 125/4.0 is therefore the inexpensive and robust separa-sulfonic acid groups tion column for the determination of transition metals by Column dimensions 125 x 4.0 mm direct conductivity measurement without post-column Column body Stainless steel reaction. In addition to high concentrations of alkaline Standard flow 1.5 mL/min metals, calcium, and magnesium can be determined reli-Maximum flow 5.0 mL/min ably. The column is only suitable for divalent cations. Maximum pressure 40 MPa Monovalent cations elute at almost the same time as the Particle size 5 µm injection peak. pH range 2...8 Capacity 95 µmol (K+) Eluents Tartaric acid/ Tartaric acid 1200 mg/2 L 4.0 mmol/L citric acid eluent Citric acid 192 mg/2 L 0.5 mmol/L (standard eluent) Ethylenediamine 360 mg/2 L 3.0 mmol/L Acetone 100 mL/2 L 5% Care Regeneration Storage Injection of 100 µL Na H EDTA (0.1 mol/L) – do not use For short periods (days) in the eluent, for longer periods 2 2 alkaline EDTA solutions – or rinse with 30 mL HNO (weeks) in methanol/water (1:4). 3 (0.1 mol/L) at a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min. 155 Chromatograms Tartaric acid/citric acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Nickel 5.00 4 Iron (II) 10.00 2 Zinc 5.00 5 Calcium 5.00 3 Cobalt 5.00 6 Magnesium 5.00 Tartaric acid/citric acid eluent, tap water Conc. (mg/L) Tartaric acid/citric acid eluent, 1 Zinc 0.12 3 Magnesium 1.89 «produced water» of an oil platform Conc. (mg/L) 2 Calcium 8.94 1 Strontium 33.8 3 Magnesium 29.0 2 Barium 53.9 Ordering information Nucleosil 5SA - 125/4.0 6.1007.000 Nucleosil 5SA 2 Guard cartridge/4.0 6.1007.110 Holder to Nucleosil 5SA 2 Guard Cartridge/4.0 6.2821.140 (holder for guard column cartridges 6.1007.110) Metrosep C 3 - 100/4.0 (6.1010.410) 156 The substrate on a polyvinyl alcohol base increases selec-Applications tivity for monovalent and divalent cations significantly on • Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH +, 4 this cation column. The peak forms are highly symmetri-Mn2+, Co2+, Zn2+, Ni2+ cal. • Larger organic amines • Low detection limits The shortest separation column of the Metrosep-C-3 • Matrices with high pH product range is particularly suitable for rapid separations of standard cations and for the separation of larger Technical information organic amines. Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with carboxyl groups Column dimensions 100 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 1.0 mL/min Maximum flow 1.5 mL/min Maximum pressure 15 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifiers 0...50% acetonitrile, 0...30% acetone, no methanol pH range 2...12 Temperature range 20...40 °C Capacity 12 µmol (K+) Eluents Nitric acid eluent Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 10 mL/2 L 5 mmol/L (standard eluent) Column temperature 40 °C Care Regeneration Storage Add 30% acetonitrile to the standard eluent. For 1...3 days in the eluent; in ultrapure water for longer storage. Recommended temperature: 4...8 °C 157 Chromatograms Nitric acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Nitric acid eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) 1 Lithium 1.00 4 Potassium 10.00 1 Sodium 5.83 3 Magnesium 18.91 2 Sodium 5.00 5 Magnesium 10.00 2 Potassium 1.45 4 Calcium 87.51 3 Ammonium 5.00 6 Calcium 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep C 3 - 100/4.0 6.1010.410 Metrosep C 3 Guard/4.0 6.1010.450 Metrosep C 3 S-Guard/4.0 6.1010.460 Metrosep C 3 - 150/4.0 (6.1010.420) 158 The substrate on a polyvinyl alcohol base increases selec-Applications tivity for monovalent and divalent cations significantly. • Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH +, 4 The peak forms on this cation column are highly sym- Mn2+, Co2+, Zn2+, Ni2+ metrical. • Organic amines • Low detection limits The middle separation column of the Metrosep-C-3 • Matrices with high pH product range is particularly suitable for rapid separations of standard cations and certain transition metal cations Technical information as well as for the separation of mid-sized organic amines. Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with carboxyl groups Column dimensions 150 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 1.0 mL/min Maximum flow 1.5 mL/min Maximum pressure 15 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifiers 0...50% acetonitrile, 0...30% acetone, no methanol pH range 2...12 Temperature range 20...40 °C Capacity 18 µmol (K+) Eluents Nitric acid eluent Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 10 mL/2 L 5 mmol/L (standard eluent) Column temperature 40 °C Nitric acid eluent Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 5 mL/2 L 2.5 mmol/L (modified) Column temperature 40 °C Care Storage Regeneration For 1...3 days in the eluent; in ultrapure water for longer Add 30% acetonitrile to the standard eluent. storage. Recommended temperature: 4...8 °C 159 Chromatograms Nitric acid eluent, modified, traces of cations, 40 °C Conc. (µg/L) 1 Lithium 0.050 5 Potassium 0.050 2 Sodium 0.050 6 Diethylamine 0.100 3 Ammonium 0.050 7 Triethylamines 0.100 4 Monoethylamine 0.100 Nitric acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Nitric acid eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) 1 Lithium 1.00 4 Potassium 10.00 1 Sodium 5.86 3 Magnesium 18.90 2 Sodium 5.00 5 Magnesium 10.00 2 Potassium 1.41 4 Calcium 87.48 3 Ammonium 5.00 6 Calcium 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep C 3 - 150/4.0 6.1010.420 Metrosep C 3 Guard/4.0 6.1010.450 Metrosep C 3 S-Guard/4.0 6.1010.460 Metrosep C 3 - 250/4.0 (6.1010.430) 160 The substrate on a polyvinyl alcohol base increases selec-Applications tivity for monovalent and divalent cations significantly. A • Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH +, 4 characteristic of this is the number of «theoretical plates Mn2+, Co2+, Zn2+, Ni2+ per meter». On the Metrosep C 3 - 250/4.0, for example, • Good Na+/NH + separation 4 42,000 plates are achieved for sodium, 51,000 for • Low detection limits ammonium, and 31,000 for barium with its delayed elu- • Matrices with high pH tion. The peak forms on this cation column are highly symmetrical. Technical information Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with The selectivity of the Metrosep C 3 - 250/4.0 also permits carboxyl groups the separation of transition metals. Because Metrohm Column dimensions 250 x 4.0 mm ion chromatographs generally determine the cations Column body PEEK without chemical suppression, the transition metals can Standard flow 1.0 mL/min be analyzed on the Metrosep C 3 - 250/4.0 together with Maximum flow 1.5 mL/min the alkaline and earth alkaline metals. Maximum pressure 15 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifiers 0...50% acetonitrile, 0...30% acetone, no methanol pH range 2...12 Temperature range 20...40 °C Capacity 30 µmol (K+) Eluents Nitric acid eluent Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 10 mL/2 L 5 mmol/L (standard eluent) Column temperature 40 °C Nitric acid/crown ether Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 7 mL/2 L 3.5 mmol/L eluent Crown ether 18-crown-6 264 mg/2 L 0.5 mmol/L Column temperature 40 °C Care Storage Regeneration For 1...3 days in the eluent; in ultrapure water for longer Add 30% acetonitrile to the standard eluent. storage. Recommended temperature: 4...8 °C 161 Chromatograms Nitric acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Lithium 1.00 5 Magnesium 10.00 2 Sodium 5.00 6 Manganese 10.00 3 Ammonium 5.00 7 Zinc 10.00 4 Potassium 10.00 8 Calcium 10.00 Nitric acid eluent, lake water, 40 °C Conc (mg/L) Nitric acid/crown ether eluent, standard Conc. (µg/L) 1 Lithium n.q. 4 Magnesium 82.8 1 Sodium 2000 4 Magnesium 2500 2 Sodium 109.7 5 Calcium 6.3 2 Ammonium 2 5 Calcium 15000 3 Potassium 86.7 3 Potassium 500 Ordering information Metrosep C 3 - 250/4.0 6.1010.430 Metrosep C 3 Guard/4.0 6.1010.450 Metrosep C 3 S-Guard/4.0 6.1010.460 Metrosep C 4 - 50/4.0 (6.1050.450) 162 The Metrosep C 4 - 50/4.0 is the shortest separation Applications column in the Metrosep-C-4 product range. With a ca pa- • Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH + 4 city of 5 µmol (K+), it is particularly suitable for very rapid • Alkylamines separations. The low capacity makes it possible to • Very rapid separations quickly analyze the earth alkaline metals with their de - • Simple sample matrices layed elution. Thanks to the short retention times, applications that, in terms of analysis duration, were previ-Technical information ously possible only with an FIA system (Flow Injection Substrate Silica gel with Analysis system) can now be transferred over to ion carboxyl groups chromatography. Column dimensions 50 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.9 mL/min Maximum flow 2.0 mL/min Maximum pressure 25 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier Eluent: 0…100% acetone and acetonitrile (no alcohols) Sample: 0…100% acetone, acetonitrile, and alcohols pH range 2...7 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 5 µmol (K+) Eluents Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 3.4 mL/2 L 1.7 mmol/L dipicolinic acid eluent Dipicolinic acid 234 mg/2 L 0.7 mmol/L (standard eluent) Nitric acid eluent Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 4 mL/2 L 2.0 mmol/L (modified) Care Regeneration Inorganic contamination: Rinse the column in the oppo-Organic contamination: Rinse the column in the opposite site flow direction with 10 mmol/L HNO + 4 mmol/L 3 flow direction at a flow rate of 0.9 mL/min for 1 h with dipicolinic acid for 1 h at a flow rate of 0.9 mL/min. ultrapure water, then for 1 h with acetonitrile/water (40/60), and finally for 1 h with ultrapure water. Storage In the eluent or in ultrapure water 163 Chromatograms Nitric acid eluent, modified, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Lithium 1.00 6 Magnesium 10.00 2 Sodium 5.00 7 Calcium 10.00 3 Potassium 5.00 8 Strontium 20.00 4 Rubidium 10.00 9 Barium 20.00 5 Cesium 10.00 Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) Nitric acid eluent, modified, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Sodium 3.89 3 Calcium 82.82 1 Ethylenediamine 50.0 2 Potassium 1.13 4 Magnesium 18.78 Ordering information Metrosep C 4 - 50/4.0 6.1050.450 Metrosep C 4 Guard/4.0 6.1050.500 Metrosep C 4 S-Guard/4.0 6.1050.510 Metrosep C 4 - 100/4.0 (6.1050.410) 164 The 100 mm version of the Metrosep C 4 column is Applications intended for rapid determinations of the standard cat- • Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH + 4 ions. Very short retention times are achieved, for which • Lipophilic amines with short retention times the elution times of sodium and ammonium nevertheless • Rapid separations differ by 25 s. When a special eluent is used, the six cations lithium, ammonium, sodium, calcium, magnesium, Technical information and potassium can be determined in less than 5 minutes Substrate Silica gel with with the Metrosep C 4 - 100/4.0. carboxyl groups Column dimensions 100 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.9 mL/min Maximum flow 2.0 mL/min Maximum pressure 25 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier Eluent: 0…100% acetone and acetonitrile (no alcohols) Sample: 0…100% acetone, acetonitrile, and alcohols pH range 2...7 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 10 µmol (K+) Eluents Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 3.4 mL/2 L 1.7 mmol/L dipicolinic acid eluent Dipicolinic acid 234 mg/2 L 0.7 mmol/L (standard eluent) Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 3.4 mL/2 L 1.7 mmol/L dipicolinic acid/acetone Dipicolinic acid 234 mg/2 L 0.7 mmol/L eluent Acetone 100 mL/2 L 5% Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 4.0 mL/2 L 2.0 mmol/L dipicolinic acid eluent Dipicolinic acid 401 mg/2 L 1.2 mmol/L (modified) Care Inorganic contamination: Rinse the column in the oppo-Regeneration site flow direction with 10 mmol/L HNO + 4 mmol/L 3 Organic contamination: Rinse the column in the opposite dipicolinic acid for 1 h at a flow rate of 0.9 mL/min. flow direction at a flow rate of 0.9 mL/min for 1 h with ultrapure water, then for 1 h with acetonitrile/water Storage (40/60), and finally for 1 h with ultrapure water. In the eluent or in ultrapure water 165 Chromatograms Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) 1 Lithium 1.00 4 Potassium 10.00 1 Sodium 3.89 3 Calcium 82.82 2 Sodium 5.00 5 Calcium 10.00 2 Potassium 1.13 4 Magnesium 18.78 3 Ammonium 5.00 6 Magnesium 10.00 Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid/acetone eluent, 1 Lithium n.q. 4 Calcium 87.4 standard Conc. (mg/L) 2 Sodium 20.6 5 Magnesium 19.9 1 Sodium 5.00 4 Guanidine 15.00 3 Potassium 1.7 6 Strontium n.q. 2 Ammonium 5.00 5 Aminoguanidine 15.00 3 Methylamine 5.00 Ordering information Metrosep C 4 - 100/4.0 6.1050.410 Metrosep C 4 Guard/4.0 6.1050.500 Metrosep C 4 S-Guard/4.0 6.1050.510 Metrosep C 4 S-Guard - 50/4.0 6.1050.530 Metrosep C 4 - 150/4.0 (6.1050.420) 166 The Metrosep C 4 - 150/4.0 is the universal standard Applications column in cation analysis. High separating efficiency in a • Standard column brief time. The Metrosep C 4 - 150/4.0 is the ideal sepa- • Amines ration column for the analysis of alkaline and earth alka- • Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH + 4 line metals in aqueous media. • Universal applications • Different matrices Technical information Substrate Silica gel with carboxyl groups Column dimensions 150 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.9 mL/min Maximum flow 2.0 mL/min Maximum pressure 25 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier Eluent: 0…100% acetone and acetonitrile (no alcohols) Sample: 0…100% acetone, acetonitrile, and alcohols pH range 2...7 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 15 µmol (K+) Eluents Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 3.4 mL/2 L 1.7 mmol/L dipicolinic acid eluent Dipicolinic acid 234 mg/2 L 0.7 mmol/L (standard eluent) Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 3.4 mL/2 L 1.7 mmol/L dipicolinic acid/ Dipicolinic acid 234 mg/2 L 0.7 mmol/L crown ether eluent 18-crown-6 26.4 mg/2 L 0.05 mmol/L Care Inorganic contamination: Rinse the column in the oppo-Regeneration site flow direction with 10 mmol/L HNO + 4 mmol/L 3 Organic contamination: Rinse the column in the opposite dipicolinic acid for 1 h at a flow rate of 0.9 mL/min. flow direction at a flow rate of 0.9 mL/min for 1 h with ultrapure water, then for 1 h with acetonitrile/water Storage (40/60), and finally for 1 h with ultrapure water. In the eluent or in ultrapure water 167 Chromatograms Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) 1 Lithium 1.00 4 Potassium 10.00 1 Lithium n.q. 4 Potassium 1.13 2 Sodium 5.00 5 Calcium 10.00 2 Sodium 3.89 5 Calcium 82.82 3 Ammonium 5.00 6 Magnesium 10.00 3 Ammonium n.q. 6 Magnesium 18.78 Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, wine Conc. (mg/L) Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid/crown ether eluent, 1 unknown – 5 Potassium 1100 standard Conc. (mg/L) 2 unknown – 6 Histamine 110.8 1 Lithium 2.00 6 Potassium 10.0 3 unknown – 7 unknown – 2 Sodium 5.00 7 Triethanolamine 30.0 4 unknown – 8 Magnesium n.q. 3 Ammonium 5.00 8 Calcium 10.0 4 Monoethanolamine 30.0 9 Magnesium 10.0 5 Diethanolamine 30.0 Ordering information Metrosep C 4 - 150/4.0 6.1050.420 Metrosep C 4 Guard/4.0 6.1050.500 Metrosep C 4 S-Guard/4.0 6.1050.510 Metrosep C 4 S-Guard - 50/4.0 6.1050.530 Metrosep C 4 - 250/4.0 (6.1050.430) 168 The Metrosep C 4 - 250/4.0 is the cation column with the Applications greatest capacity in the C 4 series. It is predestined for • Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH +, 4 applications which require the highest separating effi-Co2+, Ni2+, Zn2+, Cd2+, Pb2+, amines ciency. Samples with extreme differences in concentra- • Very good Na+/NH + separation 4 tions can be analyzed reliably with this column. The • NH +, (CH )NH +, (CH ) NH +, (CH ) NH+, (CH ) N+, 4 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 4 performance capability of the column is demonstrated, and the respective ethanolamines for example, in connection with the analysis of boiler • Difficult separation problems feed water for which the requirement is the perfect • Great differences in concentration quantification of 7 µg/L sodium in addition to 7 mg/L • Transition metals monoethanolamine (MEA). With the C 4 - 250/4.0, not only amines and transition metals but also alkaline and Technical information alkaline earth metals can be determined in a single run. Substrate Silica gel with carboxyl groups Column dimensions 250 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.9 mL/min Maximum flow 2.0 mL/min Maximum pressure 25 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier Eluent: 0…100% acetone and acetonitrile (no alcohols) Sample: 0…100% acetone, acetonitrile, and alcohols pH range 2...7 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 25 µmol (K+) Eluents Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 3.4 mL/2 L 1.7 mmol/L dipicolinic acid eluent Dipicolinic acid 234 mg/2 L 0.7 mmol/L (standard eluent) Amine eluent Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 3.4 mL/2 L 1.7 mmol/L Dipicolinic acid 234 mg/2 L 0.7 mmol/L 18-crown-6 26.4 mg/2 L 0.05 mmol/L Acetone 25 mL/2 L 2.5% Care Inorganic contamination: Rinse the column in the oppo-Regeneration site flow direction with 10 mmol/L HNO + 4 mmol/L 3 Organic contamination: Rinse the column in the opposite dipicolinic acid for 1 h at a flow rate of 0.9 mL/min. flow direction at a flow rate of 0.9 mL/min for 1 h with ultrapure water, then for 1 h with acetonitrile/water Storage (40/60), and finally for 1 h with ultrapure water. In the eluent or in ultrapure water 169 Chromatograms Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Lithium 1.00 4 Potassium 10.00 2 Sodium 5.00 5 Calcium 10.00 3 Ammonium 5.00 6 Magnesium 10.00 Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) Amine eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Lithium n.q. 4 Calcium 82.81 1 Lithium 0.4 8 Methyldiethanol- 2 Sodium 3.90 5 Magnesium 18.76 2 Sodium 1.0 amine 4.0 3 Potassium 1.12 3 Ammonium 1.0 9 Diethanolisopro- 4 Ethanolamine 1.0 panolamine 4.0 5 Diethanolamine 2.0 10 Triisopropanolamine 4.0 6 Potassium 1.0 11 Calcium 2.0 7 Triethanolamine 2.0 12 Magnesium 2.0 Ordering information Metrosep C 4 - 250/4.0 6.1050.430 Metrosep C 4 Guard/4.0 6.1050.500 Metrosep C 4 S-Guard/4.0 6.1050.510 Metrosep C 4 S-Guard - 50/4.0 6.1050.530 Metrosep C 5 - 150/4.6 (6.4000.320) 170 The Metrosep C 5 - 150/4.6 is based on a sulfonated Applications polystyrene/divinylbenzene polymer. The strongly acidic • Special column for transition metals cation-exchanger groups make it a preferred separation column for the determination of divalent cations, partic-Technical information ularly of transition metals. The column is preferably also Substrate Sulfonated polystyrene/ used with UV/VIS detection after post-column reaction. divinylbenzene polymer This column may also be used with sequential suppres- Column dimensions 150 x 4.6 mm sion. Column body PEEK Standard flow 1.0 mL/min Maximum flow 1.5 mL/min Maximum pressure 4.9 MPa Particle size 12 µm Organic modifier 0...5% (10% acetonitrile) pH range 1...14 (optimal 2...6) Temperature range 20...70 °C Capacity 15 µmol (K+) Eluents Oxalic acid/citric acid Oxalic acid 1.080 g/2 L 6.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Citric acid 1.153 g/2 L 3.0 mmol/L KOH pH = 4.2 PCR reagents PAR PAR (4(2-pyridylazo) resorcinol 64.6 mg/2 L 0.15 mmol/L Ammonium hydroxide (c = 1 mol/L) 800 mL/2 L 0.4 mol/L Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 160 mL/2 L 80 mmol/L pH = 10...11 Care Regeneration Contamination from proteins and nitrogen components: Slight contamination (e.g. divalent cations): Operate the Rinse the column with the following solutions in sequence column with eluent (0.5 mL/min, room temperature) and (0.5 mL/min, room temperature): inject 100 µL 1 mol/L nitric acid 4...6 times in succession. • 30 min ultrapure water • 60 min (30 mL) 100 mmol/L sodium hydroxide More extreme contamination: In the event of heavier • 60 min (30 mL) 100 mmol/L nitric acid contamination, rinse the column with the following solu- • Eluent for rinsing the column tions in sequence (0.5 mL/min, room temperature): • 60 min (30 mL) 100 mmol/L tartaric acid Storage • 60 min (30 mL) 100 mmol/L nitric acid Immediately after use, rinse to 3.0 mmol/L nitric acid. • Eluent for rinsing the column 171 Chromatogram Oxalic acid/citric acid eluent, PCR with PAR, VIS detection ( = 530 nm), standar y d Conc. (mg/L) 1 Copper 5.00 5 Lead 30.0 2 Nickel 3.00 6 Manganese 4.00 3 Zinc 4.00 7 Cadmium 8.00 4 Cobalt 5.00 Ordering information Metrosep C 5 - 150/4.6 6.4000.320 Metrosep RP 2 Guard/3.5 6.1011.030 Replacement filters for RP 2 Guard/3.5 (10 pcs.) 6.1011.130 Metrosep RP 3 Guard HC/4.0 6.1011.040 Metrosep BP 1 Guard/2.0 6.1015.100 Metrosep C 6 - 100/4.0 (6.1051.410) 172 The 100 mm version of the Metrosep C 6 column is Applications intended for the determination of standard cations, e.g., • Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH + 4 in drinking water. Excellent separation of sodium and • Lipophilic amines with short retention times ammonium is still achieved, even with the very short • Rapid separations retention times applied. The high capacity of the C 6 material permits larger sample volumes. Technical information Substrate Silica gel with carboxyl groups Column dimensions 100 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.9 mL/min Maximum flow 3.5 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier Eluent: 0…100% acetone and acetonitrile (no alcohols) Sample: 0…100% acetone, acetonitrile, and alcohols pH range 2...7 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 20 µmol (K+) Eluents Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 3.4 mL/2 L 1.7 mmol/L dipicolinic acid eluent Dipicolinic acid 568 mg/2 L 1.7 mmol/L (standard eluent) Oxalic acid/ Oxalic acid 360 mg/2 L 2.0 mmol/L dipicolinic acid/ Dipicolinic acid 668 mg/2 L 2.0 mmol/L acetonitril eluent Acetonitril 40 mL/2 L 2% Care Inorganic contamination: Rinse the column in the oppo-Regeneration site flow direction with 10 mmol/L HNO + 4 mmol/L 3 The column must be rinsed with ultrapure water before dipicolinic acid for 1 h at a flow rate of 0.9 mL/min. and after the regeneration. Storage Organic contamination: Rinse the column in the opposite Standard eluent at 10...22 °C flow direction at a flow rate of 0.9 mL/min for 1 h with ultrapure water, then for 1 h with acetonitrile/water (40/60). 173 Chromatograms Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Lithium 1.00 4 Potassium 10.00 2 Sodium 5.00 5 Calcium 10.00 3 Ammonium 5.00 6 Magnesium 10.00 Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) Oxalic acid/dipicolinic acid/acetonitril eluent, standard 1 Sodium 112.12 3 Calcium 33.44 Conc. (mg/L) 2 Potassium 0.75 4 Magnesium 6.88 1 Sodium 20 6 Calcium 20 2 Ammonium 20 7 Magnesium 20 3 Monoethanolamine 20 8 Strontium 20 4 Potassium 20 9 Barium 40 5 Diethanolamine 20 Ordering information Metrosep C 6 - 100/4.0 6.1051.410 Metrosep C 6 Guard/4.0 6.1051.500 Metrosep C 6 S-Guard/4.0 6.1051.510 Metrosep C 6 - 150/4.0 (6.1051.420) 174 The high-capacity C 6 material makes the Metrosep Applications C 6 - 150/4.0 separation column the optimum solution • Standard column for the separation of standard cations with high diffe- • Amines rences in concentration in conjunction with reasonable • Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH + 4 retention times. Drinking water with low ammonium • Universal applications contents can be determined with this column. • Different matrices • Transition metals Technical information Substrate Silica gel with carboxyl groups Column dimensions 150 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.9 mL/min Maximum flow 2.5 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier Eluent: 0…100% acetone and acetonitrile (no alcohols) Sample: 0…100% acetone, acetonitrile, and alcohols pH range 2...7 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 30 µmol (K+) Eluents Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 3.4 mL/2 L 1.7 mmol/L dipicolinic acid eluent Dipicolinic acid 568 mg/2 L 1.7 mmol/L (standard eluent) Care Inorganic contamination: Rinse the column in the oppo-Regeneration site flow direction with 10 mmol/L HNO + 4 mmol/L 3 The column must be rinsed with ultrapure water before dipicolinic acid for 1 h at a flow rate of 0.9 mL/min. and after the regeneration. Storage Organic contamination: Rinse the column in the opposite Standard eluent at 10...22 °C flow direction at a flow rate of 0.9 mL/min for 1 h with ultrapure water, then for 1 h with acetonitrile/water (40/60). 175 Chromatograms Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Lithium 1.00 4 Potassium 10.00 2 Sodium 5.00 5 Calcium 10.00 3 Ammonium 5.00 6 Magnesium 10.00 Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent Conc. (mg/L) 1 Sodium 109.78 3 Calcium 34.03 Temperature dependency 2 Potassium 0.65 4 Magnesium 6.59 1 Lithium 1.00 4 Potassium 10.00 2 Sodium 5.00 5 Calcium 10.00 3 Ammonium 5.00 6 Magnesium 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep C 6 - 150/4.0 6.1051.420 Metrosep C 6 Guard/4.0 6.1051.500 Metrosep C 6 S-Guard/4.0 6.1051.510 Metrosep C 6 - 250/4.0 (6.1051.430) 176 The Metrosep C 6 - 250/4.0 is the cation column with the Applications greatest capacity in the C 6 series. It is predestined for • Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH +, 4 applications which require the highest separating efficien-Co2+, Ni2+, Zn2+, Cd2+, Pb2+, amines cy. Samples with extreme differences in concentrations • Excellent Na+/NH + separation 4 can be analyzed reliably with this column. The separation • NH +, (CH )NH +, (CH ) NH +, (CH ) NH+, (CH ) N+, 4 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 4 of sodium and ammonium is particularly outstanding here. and the respective ethanolamines • Difficult separation problems • Great differences in concentration • Transition metals Technical information Substrate Silica gel with carboxyl groups Column dimensions 250 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.9 mL/min Maximum flow 1.5 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier Eluent: 0…100% acetone and acetonitrile (no alcohols) Sample: 0…100% acetone, acetonitrile, and alcohols pH range 2...7 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 50 µmol (K+) Eluents Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 3.4 mL/2 L 1.7 mmol/L dipicolinic acid eluent Dipicolinic acid 568 mg/2 L 1.7 mmol/L (standard eluent) Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 16 mL/2 L 8.0 mmol/L dipicolinic acid eluent Dipicolinic acid 434 mg/2 L 1.3 mmol/L (modified) Care Regeneration Inorganic contamination: Rinse the column in the oppoThe column must be rinsed with ultrapure water before site flow direction with 10 mmol/L HNO + 4 mmol/L 3 and after the regeneration. dipicolinic acid for 1 h at a flow rate of 0.9 mL/min. Organic contamination: Rinse the column in the opposite Storage flow direction at a flow rate of 0.9 mL/min for 1 h with Standard eluent at 10...22 °C ultrapure water, then for 1 h with acetonitrile/water (40/60). 177 Chromatograms Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent (modified), water Conc. (mg/L) 1 Sodium 3.06 4 Calcium 25.7 2 Ammonium 0.03 5 Potassium 0.67 3 Magnesium 2.95 Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, methanol 50% Conc. (mg/L) 1 Lithium 1.00 4 Potassium 10.00 1 Lithium 1.00 4 Potassium 10.00 2 Sodium 5.00 5 Calcium 10.00 2 Sodium 5.00 5 Calcium 10.00 3 Ammonium 5.00 6 Magnesium 10.00 3 Ammonium 5.00 6 Magnesium 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep C 6 - 250/4.0 6.1051.430 Metrosep C 6 Guard/4.0 6.1051.500 Metrosep C 6 S-Guard/4.0 6.1051.510 178 Separation columns 179 Microbore IC cation-separation columns for lower eluent consumption and greater sensitivity Metrosep C 4 - 100/2.0 (6.1050.210) 180 The short version of the Metrosep C 4 column with 2 mm Applications inner diameter is intended for rapid determinations of • Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH + 4 the standard cations. Very short retention times are • Lipophilic amines with short retention times achieved, for which the elution times of sodium and • High flow rate - fast separations ammonium nevertheless differ by 25 s. When a special • Fast analysis eluent is used, the six cations lithium, ammonium, sodium, calcium, magnesium, and potassium can be deter- Technical information mined in less than 5 minutes with the Metrosep C 4 - Substrate Silica gel with 100/2.0. With its low eluent flow, this column is particu-carboxyl groups larly suitable for IC-MS coupling. Column dimensions 100 x 2.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.2 mL/min Maximum flow 1.6 mL/min Maximum pressure 25 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier Eluent: 0…100% acetone and acetonitrile (no alcohols) Sample: 0…100% acetone, acetonitrile, and alcohols pH range 2...7 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 3 µmol (K+) Eluents Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 3.4 mL/2 L 1.7 mmol/L dipicolinic acid eluent Dipicolinic acid 234 mg/2 L 0.7 mmol/L (standard eluent) Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 4.0 mL/2 L 2.0 mmol/L dipicolinic acid eluent Dipicolinic acid 401 mg/2 L 1.2 mmol/L (modified) Care Regeneration Inorganic contamination: Rinse the column in the oppo-Organic contamination: Rinse the column in the opposite site flow direction with 10 mmol/L HNO + 4 mmol/L 3 flow direction at a flow rate of 0.2 mL/min for 1 h with dipicolinic acid for 1 h at a flow rate of 0.2 mL/min. ultrapure water, then for 1 h with acetonitrile/water (40/60), and finally for 1 h with ultrapure water. Storage In the eluent or in ultrapure water 181 Chromatograms Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent (modified), Conc. (mg/L) drinking water 1 Lithium n.q. 4 Calcium 87.42 2 Sodium 6.03 5 Magnesium 19.94 3 Potassium 1.69 Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) 1 Lithium 1.00 4 Potassium 10.00 1 Sodium 3.89 3 Calcium 82.82 2 Sodium 5.00 5 Calcium 10.00 2 Potassium 1.13 4 Magnesium 18.78 3 Ammonium 5.00 6 Magnesium 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep C 4 - 100/2.0 6.1050.210 Metrosep C 4 Guard/2.0 6.1050.600 Metrosep C 4 S-Guard/2.0 6.1050.610 Metrosep C 4 - 150/2.0 (6.1050.220) 182 The Metrosep C 4 - 150/2.0 is the universal standard Applications column in cation analysis of microbore separation col- • Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH + 4 umns. High separating efficiency in a brief time. The • Amines Metrosep C 4 - 150/2.0 is the ideal separation column for • Transition metals the analysis of alkaline and earth alkaline metals in aqueous media. With its low eluent flow, this column is par-Technical information ticularly suitable for IC-MS coupling. Substrate Silica gel with carboxyl groups Column dimensions 150 x 2.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.2 mL/min Maximum flow 1.1 mL/min Maximum pressure 25 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier Eluent: 0…100% acetone and acetonitrile (no alcohols) Sample: 0…100% acetone, acetonitrile, and alcohols pH range 2...7 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 4 µmol (K+) Eluents Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 3.4 mL/2 L 1.7 mmol/L dipicolinic acid eluent Dipicolinic acid 234 mg/2 L 0.7 mmol/L (standard eluent) Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 4.0 mL/2 L 2.0 mmol/L dipicolinic acid eluent Dipicolinic acid 43.6 mg/2 L 0.13 mmol/L (modified) Nitric acid eluent Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 4.0 mL/2 L 2.0 mmol/L Care Regeneration Inorganic contamination: Rinse the column in the oppo-Organic contamination: Rinse the column in the oppo- site flow direction with 10 mmol/L HNO + 4 mmol/L 3 site flow direction at a flow rate of 0.2 mL/min for 1 h dipicolinic acid for 1 h at a flow rate of 0.2 mL/min. with ultrapure water, then for 1 h with acetonitrile/water (40/60), and finally for 1 h with ultrapure water. Storage In the eluent or in ultrapure water 183 Chromatograms Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) 1 Lithium 1.00 4 Potassium 10.00 2 Sodium 5.00 5 Calcium 10.00 3 Ammonium 5.00 6 Magnesium 10.00 Nitric acid eluent, traces of cations Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent (mod.), standard Conc. (mg/L) (MiPCT), 40 °C Conc. (µg/L) 1 Zinc 2.50 7 Lead 2.50 1 Lithium 0.50 4 Potassium 0.50 2 Lithium 0.25 8 Cesium 2.50 2 Sodium 0.50 5 Magnesium 0.50 3 Cobalt 2.50 9 Manganese 2.50 3 Ammonium 0.50 6 Calcium 0.50 4 Sodium 1.25 10 Magnesium 2.50 5 Ammonium 1.25 11 Calcium 2.50 6 Potassium 2.50 Ordering information Metrosep C 4 - 150/2.0 6.1050.220 Metrosep C 4 Guard/2.0 6.1050.600 Metrosep C 4 S-Guard/2.0 6.1050.610 Metrosep C 4 - 250/2.0 (6.1050.230) 184 The Metrosep C 4 - 250/2.0 is the cation column with the Applications greatest capacity in the C 4 series with 2 mm inner dia- • Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH +, 4 meter. It is predestined for applications which require the Co2+, Ni2+, Zn2+, Cd2+, Pb2+, amines highest separating efficiency. Samples with high differ- • Good Na+/NH + separation 4 ences in concentrations can be analyzed reliably with this • NH +, (CH )NH +, (CH ) NH +, (CH ) NH+, (CH ) N+, 4 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 4 column. The performance capability of the column is and the respective ethanolamines demonstrated, for example, in connection with the • Difficult separation problems analysis of sodium traces in addition to monoethanol- • High differences in concentration amine (MEA). With the C 4 - 250/2.0, not only amines • Transition metals and transition metals but also alkaline and alkaline earth metals can be determined in a single run. With its low Technical information eluent flow, this column is particularly suitable for IC-MS Substrate Silica gel with coupling. carboxyl groups Column dimensions 250 x 2.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.2 mL/min Maximum flow 0.8 mL/min Maximum pressure 25 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier Eluent: 0…100% acetone and acetonitrile (no alcohols) Sample: 0…100% acetone, acetonitrile, and alcohols pH range 2...7 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 6 µmol (K+) Eluents Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 3.4 mL/2 L 1.7 mmol/L dipicolinic acid eluent Dipicolinic acid 234 mg/2 L 0.7 mmol/L (standard eluent) Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 5.0 mL/2 L 2.5 mmol/L oxalic acid eluent Oxalic acid 90 mg/2 L 0.5 mmol/L Care Regeneration Inorganic contamination: Rinse the column in the oppo-Organic contamination: Rinse the column in the opposite site flow direction with 10 mmol/L HNO + 4 mmol/L 3 flow direction at a flow rate of 0.2 mL/min for 1 h with dipicolinic acid for 1 h at a flow rate of 0.2 mL/min. ultrapure water, then for 1 h with acetonitrile/water (40/60), and finally for 1 h with ultrapure water. Storage In the eluent or in ultrapure water 185 Chromatograms Nitric acid/oxalic acid eluent, standard Conc. (µg/L) 1 Copper 0.50 5 Nickel 0.50 2 Sodium 0.50 6 Zinc 0.50 3 Ammonium 0.50 7 Magnesium 0.50 4 Potassium 0.50 8 Calcium 0.50 Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, standard Conc. (mg/L) Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, drinking water Conc. (mg/L) 1 Lithium 1.00 4 Potassium 10.00 1 Sodium 3.90 4 Calcium 82.81 2 Sodium 5.00 5 Calcium 10.00 2 Ammonium n.q. 5 Magnesium 18.76 3 Ammonium 5.00 6 Magnesium 10.00 3 Potassium 1.12 Ordering information Metrosep C 4 - 250/2.0 6.1050.230 Metrosep C 4 Guard/2.0 6.1050.600 Metrosep C 4 S-Guard/2.0 6.1050.610 Metrosep C 6 - 100/2.0 (6.01051.210) 186 The 100 mm version of the microbore Metrosep C 6 Applications column is intended for the determination of standard • Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH +4 cations, for example in drinking water. Short retention • Lipophilic amines with short retention times times are attained with a relatively good sodium/ammo- • Rapid separations nium separation. The high capacity of the C 6 material • IC-MS coupling permits larger sample volumes. Technical information The column is suitable for use in IC-MS coupling. Substrate Silica gel with carboxyl groups Column dimensions 100 x 2.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.25 mL/min Maximum flow 1.0 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier Eluent: 0…100% acetone and acetonitrile (no alcohols) Sample: 0…100% acetone, acetonitrile, and alcohols pH range 2...7 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 5 µmol (K+) Eluent Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 3.4 mL/2 L 1.7 mmol/L dipicolinic acid eluent Dipicolinic acid 568 mg/2 L 1.7 mmol/L (standard eluent) Care Regeneration The column must be rinsed with ultrapure water before Inorganic contamination: Rinse the column in the oppo-and after the regeneration. site flow direction with 10 mmol/L HNO + 4 mmol/L 3 dipicolinic acid for 1 h at a flow rate of 0.25 mL/min. Organic contamination: Rinse the column in the opposite flow direction at a flow rate of 0.25 mL/min for 1 h with Storage ultrapure water, then for 1 h with acetonitrile/water Standard eluent at 10...22 °C (40/60), and finally for 1 h with ultrapure water. 187 Chromatograms Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, Standard, Conc. (µg/L) Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, clean snow, Conc. (mg/L) 250 µL, 30 °C 250 µL, 30 °C 1 Lithium 40 4 Potassium 40 1 Sodium 1.044 4 Calcium 0.200 2 Sodium 800 5 Calcium 120 2 Ammonium 0.905 5 Magnesium 0.058 3 Ammonium 800 6 Magnesium 40 3 Potassium 0.052 Ordering information Metrosep C 6 - 100/2.0 6.01051.210 Metrosep C 6 Guard/2.0 6.01051.600 Metrosep C 6 S-Guard/2.0 6.01051.610 Metrosep C 6 - 150/2.0 (6.01051.220) 188 The high-capacity C 6 material makes the microbore Applications version of the Metrosep C 6 - 150/2.0 column the • Standard column optimum solution for the separation of standard cations • Amines with high differences in concentration with reasonable • Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH + 4 retention times. Drinking water with low ammonium • Universal applications contents can be determined with this column. • Different matrices The column is suitable for use in IC-MS coupling. • Transition metals • IC-MS coupling Technical information Substrate Silica gel with carboxyl groups Column dimensions 150 x 2.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.25 mL/min Maximum flow 0.7 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier Eluent: 0…100% acetone and acetonitrile (no alcohols) Sample: 0…100% acetone, acetonitrile, and alcohols pH range 2...7 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 8 µmol (K+) Eluents Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 3.4 mL/2 L 1.7 mmol/L dipicolinic acid eluent Dipicolinic acid 568 mg/2 L 1.7 mmol/L (standard eluent) Care Regeneration Inorganic contamination: Rinse the column in the oppoThe column must be rinsed with ultrapure water before site flow direction with 10 mmol/L HNO + 4 mmol/L 3 and after the regeneration. dipicolinic acid for 1 h at a flow rate of 0.25 mL/min. Organic contamination: Rinse the column in the opposite Storage flow direction at a flow rate of 0.25 mL/min for 1 h with Standard eluent at 10...22 °C ultrapure water, then for 1 h with acetonitrile/water (40/60), and finally for 1 h with ultrapure water. 189 Chromatograms Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, Conc. (mg/L) standard, 30 °C, 5 µL 1 Lithium 0.02 3 Potassium 0.21 2 Sodium 20.75 4 Calcium 10.42 3 Ammonium 0.02 6 Magnesium 2.08 Ordering information Metrosep C 6 - 150/2.0 6.01051.220 Metrosep C 6 Guard/2.0 6.01051.600 Metrosep C 6 S-Guard/2.0 6.01051.610 Metrosep C 6 - 250/2.0 (6.01051.230) 190 The Metrosep C 6 - 250/2.0 is the microbore cation col-Applications umn with the greatest capacity in the C 6 series. It is pre- • Li+, Na+, K+, Rb+, Cs+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH +, 4 destined for applications which require the highest sepa-Co2+, Ni2+, Zn2+, Cd2+, Pb2+, amines rating efficiency. Samples with extreme differences in • Excellent Na+/NH + separation 4 concentrations can be analyzed reliably with this column. • NH +, (CH )NH +, (CH ) NH +, (CH ) NH+, (CH ) N+, 4 3 3 3 2 2 3 3 3 4 The separation of sodium and ammonium is particularly and the respective ethanolamines outstanding here. The column is suitable for use in IC-MS • Difficult separation problems coupling. • Great differences in concentration • IC-MS coupling Technical information Substrate Silica gel with carboxyl groups Column dimensions 250 x 2.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 0.25 mL/min Maximum flow 0.4 mL/min Maximum pressure 20 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier Eluent: 0…100% acetone and acetonitrile (no alcohols) Sample: 0…100% acetone, acetonitrile, and alcohols pH range 2...7 Temperature range 20...60 °C Capacity 13 µmol (K+) Eluents Nitric acid/ Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 3.4 mL/2 L 1.7 mmol/L dipicolinic acid eluent Dipicolinic acid 568 mg/2 L 1.7 mmol/L (standard eluent) Nitric acid eluent Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 13.5 mL/2 L 6.75 mmol/L Care Regeneration Inorganic contamination: Rinse the column in the oppoThe column must be rinsed with ultrapure water before site flow direction with 10 mmol/L HNO + 4 mmol/L 3 and after the regeneration. dipicolinic acid for 1 h at a flow rate of 0.25 mL/min. Organic contamination: Rinse the column in the opposite Storage flow direction at a flow rate of 0.25 mL/min for 1 h with Standard eluent at 10...22 °C ultrapure water, then for 1 h with acetonitrile/water (40/60), and finally for 1 h with ultrapure water. 191 Chromatograms Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, standard, Conc. (mg/L) Nitric acid/dipicolinic acid eluent, roadside snow, Conc. (mg/L) 5 µL, 30 °C 5 µL, 30 °C 1 Lithium 0.02 4 Potassium 0.16 1 Sodium 5029 4 Calcium 32.9 2 Sodium 80.00 5 Calcium 1.00 2 Ammonium n.q. 5 Magnesium 1.8 3 Ammonium 0.02 6 Magnesium 0.04 3 Potassium 5.5 Nitric acid eluent, standard, 0.9 mL/min, Conc. (mg/L) Nitric acid eluent, mod., drinking water, Conc. (mg/L) 30 °C, 5 µL 0.9 mL/min, 30 °C, 10 µL 1 Lithium 0.02 4 Magnesium 10.14 1 Sodium 7.52 3 Potassium 2.80 2 Sodium 3.06 5 Potassium 0.38 2 Magnesium 21.40 4 Calcium 109.58 3 Ammonium 0.02 6 Calcium 41.02 Ordering information Metrosep C 6 - 250/2.0 6.01051.230 Metrosep C 6 Guard/2.0 6.01051.600 Metrosep C 6 S-Guard/2.0 6.01051.610 192 Separation columns 193 IC cation-separation columns for analyses with chemical suppression Metrosep C Supp 1 - 100/4.0 (6.1052.410) 194 The short version of the Metrosep C Supp 1 is used for Applications the rapid determination of cations in the µg/L range with • Li+, Na+, K+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH + 4 conductivity detection following sequential suppression. • Samples with low concentrations • Larger amines The baseline noise in cation analysis is improved by the • Low limits of detection suppression. This results in lower detection limits for the • Fast analysis cations to be determined. • Excellent peak shape • Matrix with high pH Technical information Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with carboxyl groups Column dimensions 100 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 1.0 mL/min Maximum flow 1.5 mL/min Maximum pressure 15 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier 0...50% acetonitrile, 0...30% acetone, no methanol pH range 1...12 Temperature range 20...40 °C Capacity 12 µmol (K+) Eluents Nitric acid eluent Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 10 mL/2 L 5.0 mmol/L (standard eluent, 40 °C) Rubidium 172.5 µg/2 L (RbNO ) 50 µg/L Rb+ 3 (from rubidium nitrate) Care Note: Ensure that the maximum pressure is never exceeded 1. 1 h with ultrapure water during regeneration. If the pressure becomes too high, 2. 1 h with acetonitrile-water mixture (30:70) reduce the flow rate. 3. 1 h with ultrapure water Regeneration: Inorganic contaminations: 1. Disconnect the column outlet from the downstream 1. Add 30% acetonitrile to the standard eluent. function units such as suppressor or detector and 2. Regenerate the column in the direction opposite to collect the flow of liquid in a beaker instead. the flow at a flow rate of 1.0 mL/min for 1 h. 2. Rinse the column with ultrapure water before and after regeneration. Storage Store the column in ultrapure water at 4...8 °C. Depending on the type of contamination, proceed in Do not store the column below 0 °C. accordance with one of the following instructions: Organic contaminations: Regenerate the column in the direction opposite to the flow at a flow rate of 1.0 mL/min with the following solutions in succession: 195 Chromatogram Nitric acid eluent, standard, 40 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Lithium 1.00 4 Magnesium 10.00 2 Sodium 5.00 5 Calcium 10.00 3 Potassium 10.00 Ordering information Metrosep C Supp 1 - 100/4.0 6.1052.410 Metrosep C Supp 1 Guard/4.0 6.1052.500 Metrosep C Supp 1 S-Guard/4.0 6.1052.510 Metrosep C Supp 1 - 150/4.0 (6.1052.420) 196 The Metrosep C Supp 1 - 150/4.0 separation column is Applications the column of choice for the determination of low con- • Li+, Na+, K+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH + 4 centrations of standard cations. • Samples with low concentrations • Organic amines Detection limits below one µg/L are achieved through • Low limits of detection low baseline noise after sequential suppression. • Transition metals • Fast analysis • Excellent peak shape • Matrix with high pH Technical information Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with carboxyl groups Column dimensions 150 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 1.0 mL/min Maximum flow 1.5 mL/min Maximum pressure 15 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier 0...50% acetonitrile, 0...30% acetone, no methanol pH range 1...12 Temperature range 20...40 °C Capacity 18 µmol (K+) Eluents Nitric acid eluent Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 10 mL/2 L 5.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Rubidium 172.5 µg/2 L (RbNO ) 50 µg/L Rb+ 3 (from rubidium nitrate) Care Note: Ensure that the maximum pressure is never exceeded 1. 1 h with ultrapure water during regeneration. If the pressure becomes too high, 2. 1 h with acetonitrile-water mixture (30:70) reduce the flow rate. 3. 1 h with ultrapure water Regeneration: Inorganic contaminations: 1. Disconnect the column outlet from the downstream 1. Add 30% acetonitrile to the standard eluent. function units such as suppressor or detector and 2. Regenerate the column in the direction opposite to collect the flow of liquid in a beaker instead. the flow at a flow rate of 1.0 mL/min for 1 h. 2. Rinse the column with ultrapure water before and after regeneration. Storage Store the column in ultrapure water at 4...8 °C. Depending on the type of contamination, proceed in Do not store the column below 0 °C accordance with one of the following instructions: Organic contaminations: Regenerate the column in the direction opposite to the flow at a flow rate of 1.0 mL/min with the following solutions in succession: 197 Chromatograms Nitric acid eluent, standard, 40 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Lithium 1.00 4 Potassium 10.00 2 Sodium 5.00 5 Magnesium 10.00 3 Ammonium 5.00 6 Calcium 10.00 Nitric acid eluent, trace standard, 40 °C Conc. (µg/L) Nitric acid eluent, lithium hexafluoride, 40 °C Conc. (µg/L) 1 Lithium 10.0 4 Potassium 10.0 1 Lithium 499 4 Potassium 3.9 2 Sodium 10.0 5 Magnesium 10.0 2 Sodium 3.4 5 Magnesium 0.3 3 Ammonium 10.0 6 Calcium 10.0 3 Ammonium 2.9 6 Calcium 1.5 Ordering information Metrosep C Supp 1 - 150/4.0 6.1052.420 Metrosep C Supp 1 Guard/4.0 6.1052.500 Metrosep C Supp 1 S-Guard/4.0 6.1052.510 Metrosep C Supp 1 - 250/4.0 (6.1052.430) 198 The Metrosep C Supp 1 - 250/4.0 separation column is Applications used for difficult separations of standard cations, some • Li+, Na+, K+, Mg2+, Ca2+, Sr2+, Ba2+, NH + 4 transition cations and amines in the low concentration • Samples with low concentrations range. Conductivity detection after sequential suppres- • Good Na+/NH + separation 4 sion enables low detection limits thanks to low baseline • Low limits of detection noise. • Matrix with high pH Technical information Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with carboxyl groups Column dimensions 250 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Standard flow 1.0 mL/min Maximum flow 1.5 mL/min Maximum pressure 15 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier 0...50% acetonitrile, 0...30% acetone, no methanol pH range 1...12 Temperature range 20...40 °C Capacity 30 µmol (K+) Eluents Nitric acid eluent Nitric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 10 mL/2 L 5.0 mmol/L (standard eluent) Rubidium 172.5 µg/2 L (RbNO ) 50 µg/L Rb+ 3 (from rubidium nitrate) Care Note: Ensure that the maximum pressure is never exceeded 1. 1 h with ultrapure water during regeneration. If the pressure becomes too high, 2. 1 h with acetonitrile-water mixture (30:70) reduce the flow rate. 3. 1 h with ultrapure water Regeneration: Inorganic contaminations: 1. Disconnect the column outlet from the downstream 1. Add 30% acetonitrile to the standard eluent. function units such as suppressor or detector and 2. Regenerate the column in the direction opposite to collect the flow of liquid in a beaker instead. the flow at a flow rate of 1.0 mL/min for 1 h. 2. Rinse the column with ultrapure water before and after regeneration. Storage Store the column in ultrapure water at 4...8 °C. Depending on the type of contamination, proceed in Do not store the column below 0 °C accordance with one of the following instructions: Organic contaminations: Regenerate the column in the direction opposite to the flow at a flow rate of 1.0 mL/min with the following solutions in succession: 199 Chromatograms Nitric acid eluent, geological leachate, 40 °C Conc. (mg/L) Nitric acid eluent, power plant sample, Conc. (µg/L) 1 Lithium 164.6 4 Magnesium 0.35 MiPCT-ME, 2000 µL, 40 °C 2 Sodium 12.9 5 Calcium 1.02 1 Lithium 1.0 3 Monoethanol- 4000 3 Potassium 0.81 2 Sodium 1.0 amine (MEA) Nitric acid eluent, standard, 40 °C Conc. (mg/L) Nitric acid eluent, magnesium sport drink, 40 °C Conc. (mg/L) 1 Lithium 1.00 4 Potassium 10.00 1 Sodium 227 4 Zinc 6.0 2 Sodium 5.00 5 Magnesium 10.00 2 Potassium 202 5 Calcium 0.6 3 Ammonium 5.00 6 Calcium 10.00 3 Magnesium 165 Ordering information Metrosep C Supp 1 - 250/4.0 6.1052.430 Metrosep C Supp 1 Guard/4.0 6.1052.500 Metrosep C Supp 1 S-Guard/4.0 6.1052.510 200 Separation columns 201 Separation column for the determination of organic substances MetroSil RP 3 - 150/4.0 (6.01070.420) 202 The MetroSil RP 3 - 150/4.0 reversed phase column with Applications medium capacity which can be used universally with • Determination of organic substances with low aqueous eluents as well as with aqueous samples. This polarity and low charge characteristic is especially important for applications in • Caffeine ion chromatography. The MetroSil RP 3 - 150/4.0 can be • Determination of pharmaceutical products used to solve application problems which lie in the • NTA, EDTA, DTPA boundary range between HPLC and ion chromatogra- (with UV/VIS detection) phy. The MetroSil RP 3 material is an "endcapped" C18 silica gel with a pore width of 120 angstroms. Technical information Substrate Silica gel C18 Column dimensions 150 x 4.0 mm Column body Stainless steel Standard flow 0.7 mL/min Maximum flow 5.0 mL/min Maximum pressure 120 MPa Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 2...9 Eluents Acetonitrile/water Acetonitrile 300 mL/2 L 15% (standard eluent) Water 1700 mL/2 L 85% Nitrate/sulfuric acid/ Potassium nitrate 44.044 g/2 L 20 mmol/L Methanol (phenol eluent) Sulfuric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 1.0 mL/2 L 0.5 mmol/L Methanol 1000 mL/2 L 50% Acetonitrile/water/sulfuric acid Acetonitrile 300 mL/2 L 15% (paracetamol eluent) Water 1660 mL/2 L 85% Sulfuric acid (c = 1 mol/L) 40 mL/2 L 20 mmol/L Care Regeneration For prolonged periods (> 48 h): Rinse for 15 min at 1.0 mL/min with each of the follow-Rinse the column with water for 30 min at 0.5 mL/min. ing: 100% water, followed by acetonitrile, isopropanol, Rinse the column with acetonitrile for 30 min at hexane, isopropanol, and back to acetonitrile. 0.5 mL/min. Storage For short periods (< 48 h): Rinse the column for 30 min at 0.5 mL/min with acetonitrile/water 50:50 (v:v). 203 Chromatograms Paracetamol eluent, standard, UV detection Phenol eluent, standard, temperature 32 °C, (λ = 256 nm) Conc. (mg/L) amperometric detection Conc. (µg/L) 1 Paracetamol 20 3 2,6 Hydroxybenzoic acid 20 1 Phenol 100 3 2,6 Dimethlyphenol 100 2 Caffeine 20 2 Cresol 100 Ordering information MetroSil RP 3 - 150/4.0 6.01070.420 MetroSil RP 3 - Guard/4.0 6.01070.500 Cartridge holder for MetroSil RP 3 Guard/4.0 6.02821.010 204 Guard columns 205 IC guard columns (precolumns) Optimum protection for the separation columns, minimal dead volume, the same phase, and therefore nearly no influence on the chromatography are the characteristics of the Metrohm IC guard columns. They are extremely efficient, easy to handle and yet economical. IC guard column cartridge for Hamilton PRP-X100 (6.1005.020) 206 For the preservation of PRP-X100 analytical separation Applications columns. The cartridge effectively removes contamina- • Anions tions in the form of particles, as might arise, for example, from inadvertent bacteria and algae growth. Technical information Column dimensions 20 x 4.0 mm Column body Stainless steel Particle size 10 µm Type Cartridge Ordering information Guard column cartridge for Hamilton PRP-X100 6.1005.020 Guard cartridge holder, 20 mm 6.02821.000 For use with Hamilton PRP-X100 - 100/4.0 6.1005.000 Hamilton PRP-X100 - 250/4.0 6.1005.010 Super-Sep Guard/4.6 (6.1009.010) For the protection of the Super-Sep - 100/4.6 analytical Applications 207 separation column • Anions Technical information Column dimensions 12 x 4.6 mm Column body Stainless steel Particle size 12 µm Type Column Ordering information Super-Sep Guard/4.6 6.1009.010 For use with Super-Sep - 100/4.6 6.1009.000 Metrosep Dual 4 Guard Column kit (6.1016.500) 208 Even if the Dual-4 columns based on monolithic silica gel Applications are very durable, the use of the Dual 4 guard column is • Anions advised in order to increase the safety of the analytical separation column even more. The Dual 4 guard column Technical information is a PEEK cartridge which is also filled with monolithic Substrate Monolithic silica gel silica gel. This cartridge is easy to replace and is screwed Column dimensions 5 x 4.6 mm directly onto the analytical column in an aluminum Column body PEEK cartridge in an holder. The proven «On Column Guard System» is simple aluminum cartridge holder to use and additionally offers the advantage of minimal (replaceable) dead volume. Particle size Monolith with 2 µm Macropores and 13 nm Mesopores Organic modifier 0...5% methanol or acetonitrile only pH range 0...8 Type Cartridge Ordering information Guard column kit for the Metrosep Dual 4, comprised of three guard column cartridges and one guard column cartridge holder 6.1016.500 Guard column cartridges for the Metrosep Dual 4 (3 pcs.) 6.1016.510 For use with Metrosep Dual 4 - 100/4.6 6.1016.030 Metrosep A Supp 1 Guard/4.6 (6.1005.340) The Metrosep A Supp 1 Guard/4.6 protects the Metrosep Applications 209 A Supp 1 - 250/4.6 separation column against contami- • Anions nation from particles and bacteria. • Oxhalogenides Technical information Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 50 x 4.6 mm Column body PEEK Particle size 7 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 0...13 Type Column Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 1 Guard/4.6 6.1005.340 For use with Metrosep A Supp 1 - 250/4.6 6.1005.300 Metrosep A Supp 4 Guard/4.0 (6.01021.500) Metrosep A Supp 4 S-Guard/4.0 (6.01021.510) 210 The Metrosep A Supp 4 Guard/4.0 reliably protects the Applications Metrosep A Supp 4 IC anion column against contamina- • Anions tion from the sample or eluent. It contains the same separation material as the Metrosep A Supp 4, is also Technical information made of PEEK, and is screwed directly onto the separa-Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with tion column with nearly no dead volume («On Column quaternary Guard System»). The guard column prolongs the lifetime ammonium groups of the analytical column, with practically no influence on Column dimensions 5 x 4.0 mm its chromatographic separation performance. The eco- Column body PEEK nomical price and simple handling make using the Particle size 9 µm Metrosep A Supp 4 Guard/4.0 highly recommended. Organic modifier 0...100% (particularly acetone, acetonitrile, methanol) pH range 3...12 Type Column Important note If separation columns with a length of 250 mm are used in a column oven of the «Advanced» instrument generation, then the Metrosep A Supp 4 S-Guard/4.0 (6.01021.510) must be used instead of the Metrosep A Supp 4 Guard/4.0 (6.01021.500). It is connected to the 250 mm column by means of capillary connection and can thus also be placed in the column oven. Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 4 Guard/4.0 6.01021.500 Metrosep A Supp 4 S-Guard/4.0 6.01021.510 For use with Metrosep A Supp 4 - 250/4.0 6.1006.430 Metrosep A Supp 4 Guard/2.0 (6.01021.600) Metrosep A Supp 4 S-Guard/2.0 (6.01021.610) The Metrosep A Supp 4 Guard/2.0 reliably protects the Applications 211 Metrosep A Supp 4 microbore anion column against • Anions contamination from the sample or eluent. It contains the same separation material as the Metrosep A Supp 4, is Technical information also made of PEEK, and is screwed directly onto the Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with separation column with nearly no dead volume («On quaternary Column Guard System»). The guard column prolongs the ammonium groups lifetime of the analytical column, with practically no influ-Column dimensions 5 x 2.0 mm ence on its chromatographic separation performance. Column body PEEK The economical price and simple handling make using Particle size 9 µm the Metrosep A Supp 4 Guard/2.0 highly recommended. Organic modifier 0...100% (particularly acetone, acetonitrile, methanol) pH range 3...12 Type Column Important note If separation columns with a length of 250 mm are used in a column oven of the «Advanced» instrument generation, then the Metrosep A Supp 4 S-Guard/2.0 (6.01021.610) must be used instead of the Metrosep A Supp 4 Guard/2.0 (6.01021.600). It is connected to the 250 mm column by means of capillary connection and can thus also be placed in the column oven. Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 4 Guard/2.0 6.01021.600 Metrosep A Supp 4 S-Guard/2.0 6.01021.610 For use with Metrosep A Supp 4 - 250/2.0 6.01021.230 Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/4.0 (6.1006.500) Metrosep A Supp 5 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1006.540) 212 The Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/4.0 reliably protects the Applications Metrosep A Supp 5 and 7 IC anion columns against con- • Anions tamination from the sample or eluent. It contains the same separation material as the Metrosep A Supp 5, is Technical information also made of PEEK, and is screwed directly onto the Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with separation column with nearly no dead volume («On quaternary Column Guard System»). The guard column prolongs the ammonium groups lifetime of the analytical column, with practically no influ-Column dimensions 5 x 4.0 mm ence on its chromatographic separation performance. Column body PEEK The economical price and simple handling make using Particle size 5 µm the Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/4.0 highly recommended. Organic modifier 0...100% (particularly acetone, acetonitrile, methanol) pH range 3...12 Type Column Important note If separation columns with a length of 250 mm are used in a column oven of the «Advanced» instrument generation, then the Metrosep A Supp 5 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1006.540) must be used instead of the Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/4.0 (6.1006.500). It is connected to the 250 mm column by means of capillary connection and can thus also be placed in the column oven. Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/4.0 6.1006.500 Metrosep A Supp 5 S-Guard/4.0 6.1006.540 For use with Metrosep A Supp 5 - 50/4.0 6.1006.550 Metrosep A Supp 5 - 100/4.0 6.1006.510 Metrosep A Supp 5 - 150/4.0 6.1006.520 Metrosep A Supp 5 - 250/4.0 6.1006.530 Metrosep A Supp 7 - 150/4.0 6.1006.620 Metrosep A Supp 7 - 250/4.0 6.1006.630 Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/2.0 (6.1006.600) Metrosep A Supp 5 S-Guard/2.0 (6.1006.610) The Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/2.0 reliably protects the Applications 213 Metrosep A Supp 5 and 7 microbore anion columns • Anions against contamination from the sample or eluent. It contains the same separation material as the Metrosep A Technical information Supp 5, is also made of PEEK, and is screwed directly Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with onto the separation column with nearly no dead volume quaternary («On Column Guard System»). The guard column pro- ammonium groups longs the lifetime of the analytical column, with practi-Column dimensions 5 x 2.0 mm cally no influence on its chromatographic separation Column body PEEK performance. The economical price and simple handling Particle size 5 µm make using the Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/2.0 highly Organic modifier 0...100% (particularly recommended. acetone, acetonitrile, methanol) pH range 3...12 Type Column Important note If separation columns with a length of 250 mm are used in a column oven of the «Advanced» instrument generation, then the Metrosep A Supp 5 S-Guard/2.0 (6.1006.610) must be used instead of the Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/2.0 (6.1006.600). It is connected to the 250 mm column by means of capillary connection and can thus also be placed in the column oven. Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 5 Guard/2.0 6.1006.600 Metrosep A Supp 5 S-Guard/2.0 6.1006.610 For use with Metrosep A Supp 5 - 150/2.0 6.1006.220 Metrosep A Supp 5 - 250/2.0 6.1006.230 Metrosep A Supp 7 - 150/2.0 6.1006.640 Metrosep A Supp 7 - 250/2.0 6.1006.650 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/4.0 (6.1020.500) Metrosep A Supp 10 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1020.510) Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard HC/4.0 (6.1020.520) 214 The Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/4.0 reliably protects the Applications A Supp 10 analytical separation columns against con- • Anions tamination. Thanks to the «On Column Guard System», the guard column is very easy to handle. The guard col-Technical information umn screws easily and directly onto the analytical column Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene without tools. copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 6.1020.500: 5 x 4.0 mm 6.1020.510: 5 x 4.0 mm 6.1020.520: 12.5 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Particle size 4.6 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 0...14 Type Column Important note If separation columns with a length of 250 mm are used in a column oven of the «Advanced» instrument generation, then the Metrosep A Supp 10 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1020.510) must be used instead of the Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/4.0 (6.1020.500). It is connected to the 250 mm column by means of capillary connection and can thus also be placed in the column oven. The Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard HC/4.0 is the high- capacity variant of the Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/4.0. The separation of cyclamate and phosphate is signifi- cantly improved when the Metrosep A Supp 5 - 100/4.0 (6.1006.510) is combined with the Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard HC/4.0. Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/4.0 6.1020.500 Metrosep A Supp 10 S-Guard/4.0 6.1020.510 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard HC/4.0 6.1020.520 For use with Metrosep A Supp 5 - 100/4.0 (with Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard HC/4.0; 6.1020.520) 6.1006.510 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 50/4.0 6.1020.050 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 75/4.0 6.1020.070 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 100/4.0 6.1020.010 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 250/4.0 6.1020.030 Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/2.0 (6.1020.600) Metrosep A Supp 10 S-Guard/2.0 (6.1020.610) The Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/2.0 column reliably Applications 215 protects the Metrosep A Supp 10 microbore separation • Anions columns against contamination. Thanks to the «On Column Guard System», the guard column is very easy to Technical information handle. The guard column screws easily and directly onto Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene the analytical column without tools. copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 5 x 2.0 mm Column body PEEK Particle size 4.6 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 0...14 Type Column Important note If separation columns with a length of 250 mm are used in a column oven of the «Advanced» instrument generation, then the Metrosep A Supp 10 S-Guard/2.0 (6.1020.610) must be used instead of the Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/2.0 (6.1020.600). It is connected to the 250 mm column by means of capillary connection and can thus also be placed in the column oven. Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 10 Guard/2.0 6.1020.600 Metrosep A Supp 10 S-Guard/2.0 6.1020.610 For use with Metrosep A Supp 10 - 50/2.0 6.1020.250 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 75/2.0 6.1020.270 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 100/2.0 6.1020.210 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 150/2.0 6.1020.220 Metrosep A Supp 10 - 250/2.0 6.1020.230 Metrosep A Supp 16 Guard/4.0 (6.1031.500) Metrosep A Supp 16 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1031.510) 216 The Metrosep A Supp 16 Guard/4.0 reliably protects the Applications A Supp 16 analytical separation columns against con- • Anions tamination. Thanks to the «On Column Guard System», the guard column is very easy to handle. The guard Technical information column screws easily onto the analytical column without Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene tools. copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 5 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Particle size 4.6 µm Organic modifier 0...10% pH range 0...14 Type Column Important note If separation columns with a length of 250 mm are used in a column oven of the «Advanced» instrument generation, then the Metrosep A Supp 16 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1031.510) must be used instead of the Metrosep A Supp 16 Guard/4.0 (6.1031.500). It is connected to the 250 mm column by means of capillary connection and can thus also be placed in the column oven. Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 16 Guard/4.0 6.1031.500 Metrosep A Supp 16 S-Guard/4.0 6.1031.510 For use with Metrosep A Supp 16 - 100/4.0 6.1031.410 Metrosep A Supp 16 - 150/4.0 6.1031.420 Metrosep A Supp 16 - 250/4.0 6.1031.430 Metrosep A Supp 7 - 150/4.0 6.1006.620 Metrosep A Supp 7 - 250/4.0 6.1006.630 Metrosep A Supp 16 Guard/2.0 (6.1031.600) Metrosep A Supp 16 S-Guard/2.0 (6.1031.610) The Metrosep A Supp 16 Guard/2.0 reliably protects the Applications 217 A Supp 16 analytical separation columns with 2 mm • For anions inner diameter against contamination. Thanks to the «On Column Guard System», the guard column is very Technical information easy to handle. The guard column screws easily onto the Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene analytical column without tools. copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 5 x 2.0 mm Column body PEEK Particle size 4.6 µm Organic modifier 0...10% pH range 0...14 Type Column Important note If separation columns with a length of 250 mm are used in a column oven of the «Advanced» instrument generation, then the Metrosep A Supp 16 S-Guard/2.0 (6.1031.610) must be used instead of the Metrosep A Supp 16 Guard/2.0 (6.1031.600). It is connected to the 250 mm column by means of capillary connection and can thus also be placed in the column oven. Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 16 Guard/2.0 6.1031.600 Metrosep A Supp 16 S-Guard/2.0 6.1031.610 For use with Metrosep A Supp 16 - 100/2.0 6.1031.210 Metrosep A Supp 16 - 150/2.0 6.1031.220 Metrosep A Supp 16 - 250/2.0 6.1031.230 Metrosep A Supp 7 - 150/2.0 6.1006.640 Metrosep A Supp 7 - 250/2.0 6.1006.650 Metrosep A Supp 17 Guard/4.0 (6.01032.500) Metrosep A Supp 17 S-Guard/4.0 (6.01032.510) 218 The Metrosep A Supp 17 Guard/4.0 reliably protects the Applications A Supp 17 analytical separation columns against con- • Anions tamination. Thanks to the «On Column Guard System», the guard column is very easy to handle. The guard Technical information column screws easily onto the analytical column without Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene tools. copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 5 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Particle size 5.0 µm Organic modifier 0...100% methanol 0...40% acetone or acetonitrile pH range 0...14 Type Column Important note If separation columns with a length of 250 mm are used in a column oven of the «Advanced» instrument generation, then the Metrosep A Supp 17 S-Guard/4.0 (6.01032.510) must be used instead of the Metrosep A Supp 17 Guard/4.0 (6.01032.500). It is connected to the 250 mm column by means of capillary connection and can thus also be placed in the column oven. Ordering information Metrosep A Supp 17 Guard/4.0 6.01032.500 Metrosep A Supp 17 S-Guard/4.0 6.01032.510 For use with Metrosep A Supp 17 - 100/4.0 6.01032.410 Metrosep A Supp 17 - 150/4.0 6.01032.420 Metrosep A Supp 17 - 250/4.0 6.01032.430 Metrosep Organic Acids Guard/4.6 (6.1005.250) The Metrosep Organic Acids Guard/4.6 effectively Applications 219 removes contamination, thus protecting the analytical • Organic acids separation column. Technical information Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene copolymer with sulfonic acid groups Column dimensions 50 x 4.6 mm Column body Stainless steel Particle size 9 µm Organic modifier 0...20% pH range 1...13 Type Column Ordering information Metrosep Organic Acids Guard/4.6 6.1005.250 For use with Metrosep Organic Acids - 100/7.8 6.1005.210 Metrosep Organic Acids - 250/7.8 6.1005.200 Metrosep Carb 2 Guard/4.0 (6.1090.500) Metrosep Carb 2 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1090.510) 220 The Metrosep Carb 2 Guard/4.0 and the the Metrosep Applications Carb 2 S-Guard/4.0 effectively removes contaminations, • Carbohydrates thus protecting the analytical separation column. The design of the guard column has been selected in such a Technical information way that its influence on chromatographic separation Substrate Polystyrene-divinylbenzene can be ignored. copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 5 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier 0...50% acetonitrile or methanol (eluent) 0...100% acetone, acetonitrile or methanol (sample) pH range 0...14 Type Column Important note If separation columns with a length of 250 mm are used in a column oven of the «Advanced» instrument generation, then the Metrosep Carb 2 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1090.510) must be used instead of the Metrosep Carb 2 Guard/4.0 (6.1090.500). It is connected to the 250 mm column by means of capillary connection and can thus also be placed in the column oven. Ordering information Metrosep Carb 2 Guard/4.0 6.1090.500 Metrosep Carb 2 S-Guard/4.0 6.1090.510 For use with Metrosep Carb 2 - 100/4.0 6.1090.410 Metrosep Carb 2 - 150/4.0 6.1090.420 Metrosep Carb 2 - 250/4.0 6.1090.430 Metrosep Carb 2 Guard/2.0 (6.01090.600) Metrosep Carb 2 S-Guard/2.0 (6.01090.610) The microbore guard column, Metrosep Carb 2 Applications 221 Guard/2.0 effectively removes contamination, thus • Carbohydrates protecting the analytical separation column. The design of the guard column has been selected in such a way Technical information that its influence on the chroma tographic separation Substrate Styrene/divinylbenzene can be ignored. copolymer with quaternary ammonium groups Column dimensions 5 x 2.0 mm Column body PEEK Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier 0...50% acetonitrile or methanol (eluent) 0...100% acetone, acetonitrile or methanol (sample) pH range 0...14 Type Column Important note If separation columns with a length of 250 mm are used in a column oven of the «Advanced» instrument generation, then the Metrosep Carb 2 S-Guard/2.0 (6.01090.610) must be used instead of the Metrosep Carb 2 Guard/2.0 (6.01090.600). It is connected to the 250 mm column by means of capillary connection and can thus also be placed in the column oven. Ordering information Metrosep Carb 2 Guard/2.0 6.01090.600 Metrosep Carb 2 S-Guard/2.0 6.01090.610 For use with Metrosep Carb 2 - 100/2.0 6.01090.210 Metrosep Carb 2 - 150/2.0 6.01090.220 Metrosep Carb 2 - 250/2.0 6.01090.230 Nucleosil 5SA 2 Guard Cartridge/4.0 (6.1007.110) 222 For the protection of the Nucleosil 5SA - 125/4.0 Applications analytical separation column. • Cations Technical information Substrate Spherical silica gel with sulfonic acid groups Column dimensions 20 x 4.0 mm Column body Stainless steel Particle size 5 µm Type Cartridge Ordering information Nucleosil 5SA 2 Guard Cartridge/4.0 6.1007.110 Holder to Nucleosil 5SA 2 Guard Cartridge/4.0 6.2821.140 For use with IC Cation Column Nucleosil 5SA - 125/4.0 6.1007.000 Metrosep C 3 Guard/4.0 (6.1010.450) Metrosep C 3 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1010.460) The Metrosep C 3 Guard/4.0 contains the C 3 column Applications 223 material and is used to protect Metrosep C 3 cation • Cations columns. Particles and contaminations are reliably retained, allowing the lifetime of the analytical separa-Technical information tion column to be extended considerably. The Metrosep Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with C 3 Guard/4.0 also functions according to the «On carboxyl groups Column Guard System» and is screwed directly onto the Column dimensions 5 x 4.0 mm separation column with nearly no dead volume. Column body PEEK Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier 50% acetonitrile or 30% acetone (no methanol) pH range 2...12 Type Column Important note If separation columns with a length of 250 mm are used in a column oven of the «Advanced» instrument generation, then the Metrosep C 3 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1010.460) must be used instead of the Metrosep C 3 Guard/4.0 (6.1010.450). It is connected to the 250 mm column by means of capillary connection and can thus also be placed in the column oven. Ordering information Metrosep C 3 Guard/4.0 6.1010.450 Metrosep C 3 S-Guard/4.0 6.1010.460 For use with Metrosep C 3 - 100/4.0 6.1010.410 Metrosep C 3 - 150/4.0 6.1010.420 Metrosep C 3 - 250/4.0 6.1010.430 Metrosep C 4 Guard/4.0 (6.1050.500) Metrosep C 4 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1050.510) Metrosep C 4 S-Guard - 50/4.0 (6.1050.530) 224 The Metrosep C 4 Guard/4.0 contains the C 4 column Applications material and is used to protect all Metrosep cation • Cations columns that have a substrate based on silica gel. Particles and contaminations are reliably retained, allow-Technical information ing the lifetime of the analytical separation column to be Substrate Silica gel with extended considerably. The economical price is an addi-carboxyl groups tional plus. The Metrosep C 4 Guard/4.0 also functions Column dimensions 5 x 4.0 mm, and according to the «On Column Guard System» and is 50 x 4.0 mm respectively screwed directly onto the separation column with nearly Column body PEEK no dead volume. In comparison with the Standard C 4 Particle size 5 µm guard columns, the Metrosep C 4 S-Guard - 50/4.0 Organic modifier 0...100% (no methanol) exhibits greater capacity and therefore an even longer pH range 2...7 service life. Type Column Important note If separation columns with a length of 250 mm are used in a column oven of the «Advanced» instrument generation, then the Metrosep C 4 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1050.510) must be used instead of the Metrosep C 4 Guard/4.0 (6.1050.500). It is connected to the 250 mm column by means of capillary connection and can thus also be placed in the column oven. Ordering information Metrosep C 4 Guard/4.0 6.1050.500 Metrosep C 4 S-Guard/4.0 6.1050.510 Metrosep C 4 S-Guard - 50/4.0 6.1050.530 For use with Metrosep C 4 - 50/4.0 6.1050.450 Metrosep C 4 - 100/4.0 6.1050.410 Metrosep C 4 - 150/4.0 6.1050.420 Metrosep C 4 - 250/4.0 6.1050.430 Metrosep C 4 Guard/2.0 (6.1050.600) Metrosep C 4 S-Guard/2.0 (6.1050.610) The Metrosep C 4 Guard/2.0 contains the C 4 column Applications 225 material and is used to protect all Metrosep cation col- • Cations umns with 2 mm inner diameter which have a substrate based on silica gel. Particles and contaminations are Technical information reliably retained, allowing the lifetime of the analytical Substrate Silica gel with separation column to be extended considerably. The carboxyl groups economical price is an additional plus. The Metrosep C 4 Column dimensions 5 x 2.0 mm Guard/2.0 also functions according to the «On Column Column body PEEK Guard System» and is screwed directly onto the separa-Particle size 5 µm tion column with nearly no dead volume. Organic modifier 0...100% (no methanol) pH range 2...7 Type Column Important note If separation columns with a length of 250 mm are used in a column oven of the «Advanced» instrument generation, then the Metrosep C 4 S-Guard/2.0 (6.1050.610) must be used instead of the Metrosep C 4 Guard/2.0 (6.1050.600). It is connected to the 250 mm column by means of capillary connection and can thus also be placed in the column oven. Ordering information Metrosep C 4 Guard/2.0 6.1050.600 Metrosep C 4 S-Guard/2.0 6.1050.610 For use with Metrosep C 4 - 100/2.0 6.1050.210 Metrosep C 4 - 150/2.0 6.1050.220 Metrosep C 4 - 250/2.0 6.1050.230 Metrosep C 6 Guard/4.0 (6.1051.500) Metrosep C 6 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1051.510) 226 The Metrosep C 6 Guard/4.0 contains the C 6 column Applications material and is used to protect all Metrosep cation • Cations columns that have a substrate based on silica gel. Particles and contaminations are reliably retained, allow-Technical information ing the lifetime of the analytical separation column to be Substrate Silica gel with extended considerably. The economical price is an addi-carboxyl groups tional plus. The Metrosep C 6 Guard/4.0 also functions Column dimensions 5 x 4.0 mm according to the «On Column Guard System» and is Column body PEEK screwed directly onto the separation column with nearly Particle size 5 µm no dead volume. Organic modifier 0...100% (no alcohol) pH range 2...7 Type Column Important note If separation columns with a length of 250 mm are used in a column oven of the «Advanced» instrument generation, then the Metrosep C 6 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1051.510) must be used instead of the Metrosep C 6 Guard/4.0 (6.1051.500). It is connected to the 250 mm column by means of capillary connection and can thus also be placed in the column oven. Ordering information Metrosep C 6 Guard/4.0 6.1051.500 Metrosep C 6 S-Guard/4.0 6.1051.510 For use with Metrosep C 6 - 100/4.0 6.1051.410 Metrosep C 6 - 150/4.0 6.1051.420 Metrosep C 6 - 250/4.0 6.1051.430 Metrosep C 6 Guard/2.0 (6.01051.600) Metrosep C 6 S-Guard/2.0 (6.01051.610) The Metrosep C 6 Guard/2.0 contains the C 6 column Applications 227 material and is used to protect all Metrosep cation col- • Cations umns with 2 mm inner diameter which have a substrate based on silica gel. Particles and contaminations are Technical information reliably retained, allowing the lifetime of the analytical Substrate Silica gel with separation column to be extended considerably. The carboxyl groups economical price is an additional plus. The Metrosep C 6 Column dimensions 5 x 2.0 mm Guard/2.0 also functions according to the «On Column Column body PEEK Guard System» and is screwed directly onto the separa-Particle size 5 µm tion column with nearly no dead volume. Organic modifier 0...100% (no alcohol) pH range 2...7 Type Column Important note If separation columns with a length of 250 mm are used in a column oven of the «Advanced» instrument generation, then the Metrosep C 6 S-Guard/2.0 (6.01051.610) must be used instead of the Metrosep C 6 Guard/2.0 (6.01051.600). It is connected to the 250 mm column by means of capillary connection and can thus also be placed in the column oven. Ordering information Metrosep C 6 Guard/2.0 6.01051.600 Metrosep C 6 S-Guard/2.0 6.01051.610 For use with Metrosep C 6 - 100/2.0 6.01051.210 Metrosep C 6 - 150/2.0 6.01051.220 Metrosep C 6 - 250/2.0 6.01051.230 Metrosep C Supp 1 Guard/4.0 (6.1052.500) Metrosep C Supp 1 S-Guard/4.0 (6.1052.510) 228 The Metrosep C Supp 1 Guard/4.0 contains the Applications C Supp 1 column material and is used to protect • Cations Metrosep C Supp 1 cation columns. Particles and contaminations are reliably retained, allowing the service Technical information life of the analytical separation column to be prolonged Substrate Polyvinyl alcohol with considerably. The Metrosep C Supp 1 Guard/4.0 also carboxyl groups functions according to the "On Column Guard System" Column dimensions 5 x 4.0 mm and is screwed directly onto the separation column Column body PEEK with nearly no dead volume. Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier 50 % Acetonitril or 30 % Aceton pH range 1...12 Type Column Ordering information Metrosep C Supp 1 Guard/4.0 6.1052.500 Metrosep C Supp 1 S-Guard/4.0 6.1052.510 For use with Metrosep C Supp 1 - 100/4.0 6.1052.410 Metrosep C Supp 1 - 150/4.0 6.1052.420 Metrosep C Supp 1 - 250/4.0 6.1052.430 Metrosep RP 2 Guard/3.5 (6.1011.030) The Metrosep RP 2 Guard/3.5 is a guard column for uni-Applications 229 versal use. It reliably protects the analytical separation • Universal guard column column against contamination, removing the smallest particles, traces of iron oxide, and bacteria. The Metrosep Technical information RP 2 Guard/3.5 helps to reduce costs; its filter disk can be Substrate Polymer replaced very easily. Column dimensions 1.0 x 3.5 mm Column body PEEK Pore size 0.2 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 1...13 Type Column Ordering information Metrosep RP 2 Guard/3.5 6.1011.030 Replacement filters for RP 2 Guard/3.5 (10 pcs.) 6.1011.130 For use with Phenomenex Star Ion A300TM - 100/4.6 6.1005.100 Phenomenex Star Ion A300TM HC - 100/10.0 6.1005.110 Metrosep Anion Dual 2 - 75/4.6 6.1006.100 Metrosep Anion Dual 3 - 100/4.0 6.1006.120 Metrosep A Supp 1 HS - 50/4.6 6.1005.350 Metrosep A Supp 3 - 250/4.6 6.1005.320 Hamilton PRP-X300 - 250/4.6 6.1005.030 Hamilton RCX-30 - 150/4.6 6.1018.010 Hamilton RCX-30 - 250/4.6 6.1018.000 Metrosep Amino Acids 1 - 100/4.0 6.4001.410 Metrosep C 5 - 150/4.6 6.4000.320 Metrosep RP 3 Guard HC/4.0 (6.1011.040) 230 The Metrosep RP 3 Guard HC/4.0 is a guard column for Applications universal use. It reliably protects the analytical separation • Universal guard column column against contamination, securely removing lipo- philic organic contamination, the smallest particles, Technical information traces of iron oxide and bacteria. The guard column is Substrate Styrene/divinylbenzene based on a polymer material and thanks to its larger pack copolymer volume, has a significantly higher capacity that the Column dimensions 5 x 4.0 mm Metrosep RP 2Guard/3.5. It can be used in the entire pH Column body PEEK range. Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 1...14 Type Column Ordering information Metrosep RP 3 Guard HC/4.0 6.1011.040 For use with Phenomenex Star Ion A300TM - 100/4.6 6.1005.100 Phenomenex Star Ion A300TM HC - 100/10.0 6.1005.110 Metrosep Anion Dual 2 - 75/4.6 6.1006.100 Metrosep Anion Dual 3 - 100/4.0 6.1006.120 Metrosep A Supp 1 HS - 50/4.6 6.1005.350 Metrosep A Supp 3 - 250/4.6 6.1005.320 Hamilton PRP-X300 - 250/4.6 6.1005.030 Hamilton RCX-30 - 150/4.6 6.1018.010 Hamilton RCX-30 - 250/4.6 6.1018.000 Metrosep Amino Acids 1 - 100/4.0 6.4001.410 Metrosep C 5 - 150/4.6 6.4000.320 MetroSil RP 3 Guard/4.0 (6.01070.500) The MetroSil RP 3 Guard/4.0 is used to protect the Applications 231 MetroSil RP 3 - 150/4.0 against contamination from par- • Organic substances ticles and bacteria. Technical information Substrate Silica gel C18 Column dimensions 14 x 4.0 mm Column body Stainless steel Particle size 5 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 2...9 Type Cartridge Ordering information MetroSil RP 3 Guard/4.0 6.01070.500 Cartridge holder for MetroSil RP 3 Guard/4.0 6.02821.010 For use with MetroSil RP 3 - 150/4.0 6.01070.420 Metrosep BP 1 Guard/2.0 (6.1015.100) 232 The Metrosep BP 1 Guard/2.0 is used to generate a suf-Applications ficiently high working pressure in the flow path of post- • Backpressure column column reagents. They are used in combination with a high-pressure pump for conveying the post-column Technical information reagent in the Professional Reactor. Substrate Diamond Column dimensions 50 x 2.0 mm Column body PEEK Particle size 6...10 µm Organic modifier 0...100% Type Column Ordering information Metrosep BP 1 Guard/2.0 6.1015.100 233 234 235 Preconcentration columns Metrosep A PCC 2/4.0 (6.1006.330), Metrosep A PCC 2 HC/4.0 (6.1006.340), and Metrosep A PCC 2 VHC/4.0 (6.1006.350) 236 The Metrosep A PCC 2/4.0 is used for the preconcentra-Applications tion of anions from small sample volumes. The small • Preconcentration of anions dead volume of the column guarantees an excellent peak shape. Technical information Substrate Polymethacrylate with qua- The Metrosep A PCC 2 HC/4.0 and the Metrosep A PCC ternary ammonium groups 2 VHC/4.0, on the other hand, are high-capacity precon-Column dimensions 6.1006.330: 1.0 x 4.0 mm centration columns for anions. They are used primarily 6.1006.340: 13.0 x 4.0 mm where large sample volumes with very low anion concen-6.1006.350: 30.0 x 4.0 mm trations must be preconcentrated. The high capacity Column body PEEK prevents premature elution of the anions by the matrix Maximum flow 5.0 mL/min itself (in most cases water). Reliable determinations can Maximum pressure 20 MPa now be made using these high-capacity columns. All Particle size 65 µm preconcentration columns are made of PEEK. Organic modifier Eluent: 0...10% (acetone, acetonitrile, methanol, isopropanol) Sample: 0...100% (acetone, acetonitrile, methanol, isopropanol) pH range 2...12 Type Column Capacity 6.1006.330: 0.5 µmol (Cl–) 6.1006.340: 5 µmol (Cl–) 6.1006.350: 10 µmol (Cl–) Care Storage In the eluent Ordering information Metrosep A PCC 2/4.0 6.1006.330 Metrosep A PCC 2 HC/4.0 6.1006.340 Metrosep A PCC 2 VHC/4.0 6.1006.350 Metrosep C PCC 1/4.0 (6.1010.300), Metrosep C PCC 1 HC/4.0 (6.1010.310), and Metrosep C PCC 1 VHC/4.0 (6.1010.320) The Metrosep C PCC 1/4.0 in the various versions are suit-Applications 237 able for the preconcentration of monovalent and divalent • Preconcentration of cations cations. They are used primarily where large sample volumes with very low cation concentrations must be pre- Technical information concentrated. In addition, they fulfill the function of a trap Substrate Spherical polymethacrylate column when working with matrix elimination, i.e. the with carboxyl groups cations to be determined are held back and allow the Column dimensions 6.1010.300: 8.5 x 4.0 mm removal of the disruptive matrix before the sample is fed 6.1010.310: 16.5 x 4.0 mm to the IC system. 6.1010.320: 30.0 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK The greater the capacity of the column (in the first approx-Maximum pressure 15 MPa imation, this is proportional to the length of the packing Particle size 35 µm bed) the larger the sample volume which can be preconOrganic modifier 0...20% methanol, ethanol, centrated. This allows detection limits into the lower ppt isopropanol or acetonitrile range. On the other hand, the packing bed increases the pH range 1...14 dead volume of the preconcentration column; with Type Column increasing size the injection peak in the chromatogram Preconcentration volume* 6.1010.300: 20 mL increases in peak area. Three different capacities provide 6.1010.310: 60 mL the needed flexibility for all preconcentration tasks. 6.1010.320: 90 mL The preconcentration columns are distinguished by very * A solution was preconcentrated with Li+ = 2 µg/L, Na+, NH + 4 low noise and very low backpressure. They are suitable for = 10 µg/L and K+ = 20 µg/L. The maximum preconcentration volume is determined by the fact that the peak area of preconcentration using a peristaltic pump or Metrohm the lithium does not continue to increase. This means that at Dosino technology. greater volumes the lithium is already eluting again from the column. Care Storage In the eluent Ordering information Metrosep C PCC 1/4.0 6.1010.300 Metrosep C PCC 1 HC/4.0 6.1010.310 Metrosep C PCC 1 VHC/4.0 6.1010.320 238 239 IC trap columns Metrosep A Trap 1 - 100/4.0 (6.1014.000) 240 The Metrosep A Trap 1 - 100/4.0 is a high capacity anion Applications column, which is used to purify the eluent flow. Even • Purification of the anion eluent flow reagents of the highest quality, e.g. «ultrapure» or «puriss.» can still contain minimal anionic contaminants. Technical information These are reliably held back by the Metrosep A Trap 1 - Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene 100/4.0. This column is primarily used with gradient copolymer with quaternary applications. ammonium groups Column dimensions 100 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Maximum pressure 25 MPa Particle size 570 µm Organic modifier 0...20% pH range 1...14 Type Column Care Regeneration a) First rinse with 30 mL 0.5 mol/L Na CO at a flow rate 2 3 of 1.0 mL/min. b) Then rinse with 30 mL ultrapure water at a flow of 1.0 mL/min. Storage In the eluent Ordering information Metrosep A Trap 1 - 100/4.0 6.1014.000 Metrosep C Trap 1 - 100/4.0 (6.1015.000) This is a high capacity cation column, which is used to Applications 241 purify the eluent flow. Even reagents of the highest • Purification of the cation eluent flow quality, e.g. «ultrapure» or «puriss.» can still contain minimal cationic contaminants. These are reliably held Technical information back by the Metrosep C Trap 1 - 100/4.0. Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene copolymer with sulfonic acid groups Column dimensions 100 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Maximum pressure 25 MPa Particle size 37...74 µm Organic modifier 0...20% pH range 1...14 Type Column Care Regeneration a) First rinse with 20 mL of 5% H SO at a flow of 2 4 1.0 mL/min. b) Then rinse with 15 mL ultrapure water at a flow of 1.0 mL/min. Storage In the eluent Ordering information Metrosep C Trap 1 - 100/4.0 6.1015.000 Metrosep RP Trap 1 - 50/4.0 (6.1014.100) 242 The Metrosep RP Trap 1 - 50/4.0 column is used to Applications eliminate organic contaminants from the eluent. The • Purification of the eluent flow Metrosep RP Trap 1 - 50/4.0 column helps avoid eluent-related interference at the baseline, especially with Technical information gradient systems. Its use is also recommended for the Substrate Silica gel purification of the p-cyanophenol eluent of the Metrosep Column dimensions 50 x 4.0 mm Dual 4 separation columns. Column body PEEK Maximum pressure 25 MPa Particle size 10 µm pH range 1...9 Type Column Care Regeneration a) Rinse with 10 mL 80% acetonitrile/water at a flow rate of 2.0 mL/min. b) Rinse with 20 mL 100% acetonitrile at a flow rate of 2.0 mL/min. c) Rinse with 10 mL 80% acetonitrile/water at a flow rate of 2.0 mL/min. Note If the Metrosep RP Trap 1 - 50/4.0 is used with the Metrosep Dual 4 (6.1016.0X0), then it must be rinsed with 40 mL water at a flow rate of 2.0 mL/min after the regeneration. Storage In the eluent Ordering information Metrosep RP Trap 1 - 50/4.0 6.1014.100 For use with Metrosep Dual 4 - 100/4.6 6.1016.030 Metrosep RP Trap 2 - 100/4.0 (6.1014.150) The Metrosep RP Trap 2 - 100/4.0 column is used to Applications 243 eliminate organic contaminants from the eluent. The • Elimination of organic contamination from the Metrosep RP Trap 2 - 100/4.0 column helps avoid eluent-eluent. related interference at the baseline, especial y with Technical information gradient systems. It is based on a polymer material. Its Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene presence enables the use of the Metrosep RP Trap 2 - copolymer 100/4.0 in the acidic as well as in the alkaline pH range. Column dimensions 100 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Maximum pressure 25 MPa pH range 1...14 Type Column Storage In ultrapure water Ordering information Metrosep RP Trap 2 - 100/4.0 6.1014.150 Metrosep I Trap 1 - 100/4.0 (6.1014.200) 244 The Metrosep I Trap 1 - 100/4.0 column is used to elimi-Applications nate ionic, i.e. cationic and anionic, contaminants from • For the elimination of traces of anionic and cationic aqueous solutions. Its use is especially recommended for contaminants from ultrapure water the purification of the transfer water in combination with «MISP» (Metrohm Inline Sample Preparation). Using the Technical information Metrosep I Trap 1 - 100/4.0 column can significantly Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene reduce the influence of the transfer water on the system copolymer with anionic blank. and cationic ion exchangers Column dimensions 100 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Maximum pressure 25 MPa Particle size 300...840 µm Organic modifier 0...100% pH range 0...14 Type Column Care Regeneration not possible Storage in ultrapure water Ordering information Metrosep I Trap 1 - 100/4.0 6.1014.200 Metrosep BO 3- Trap 1 - 100/4.0 (6.1015.200) 3 Trap column for the removal of borate contaminants Applications 3-245 from the eluent. The Metrosep BO Trap 1 - 100/4.0 is 3 • Elimination of borate traces from hydroxide mainly used in carbohydrate analysis with hydroxide elu-eluents. ents. The removal of borate from the eluent improves the peak shape of sorbitol. Technical information Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene copolymer Column dimensions 100 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Maximum pressure 25 MPa pH range 0...14 Type Column Care Conditioning Rinse the column with hydroxide eluent for 90 min at a maximum flow of 0.5 mL/min. Regeneration Rinse the column with the following solutions in succession in the direction against the flow: • during 30 min with 0.1 mol/L hydrochloric acid at a flow rate of 0.3 mL/min • during 30 min with 1 mol/L sodium chloride solution at a flow rate of 0.3 mL/min • during 30 min with ultrapure water at a flow rate of 0.5 mL/min • during 90 min with hydroxide eluent at a flow rate of maximum 0.5 mL/min Storage in ultrapure water Ordering information Metrosep BO 3- Trap 1 - 100/4.0 6.1015.200 3 Metrosep CO 2- Trap 1 - 100/4.0 (6.1015.300) 3 246 Trap column for the removal of carbonate traces in Applications hydroxide eluents. The Metrosep CO 2- Trap 1 - 100/4.0 3 • Elimination of carbonate contamination from is used in carbohydrate analysis with hydroxide eluents. hydroxide eluents Technical information Substrate Polystyrene/divinylbenzene copolymer Column dimensions 100 x 4.0 mm Column body PEEK Maximum pressure 25 MPa pH range 0...14 Type Column Care Recommended eluent concentration 5 - 40 mmol/L hydroxide eluent Regeneration Rinse the column during 840 min with 0.3 mol/L sodium hydroxide at a flow rate of 1 mL/min. Storage Store the column in 0.3 mol/L sodium hydroxide. Ordering information Metrosep CO 2- Trap 1 - 100/4.0 6.1015.300 3 247 248 249 IC sample-preparation cartridges 250 IC-RP sample-preparation cartridge (6.1012.X00) Material RP Application For the non-polar solid-phase extraction. The cartridge removes organic substances. Quantity 50 10 Bed volume 0.5 mL 0.5 mL Connection Luer Luer Order number 6.1012.000 6.1012.100 IC-H sample-preparation cartridge (6.1012.X10) Material Cation exchanger in acid form Application For the elimination of interfering cations. The cartridge can also be used for the neutralization of alkaline samples. Quantity 50 10 25 Bed volume 0.5 mL 0.5 mL 1.5 mL Capacity 0.8 mmol 0.8 mmol 2.0 mmol Connection Luer Luer Luer Order number 6.1012.010 6.1012.110 6.1012.210 IC-Ag sample-preparation cartridge (6.1012.X20) Material Cation exchanger in silver form Application For the removal of halides. Quantity 50 10 25 Bed volume 0.5 mL 0.5 mL 1.5 mL Capacity 0.8 mmol 0.8 mmol 2.0 mmol Connection Luer Luer Luer Order number 6.1012.020 6.1012.120 6.1012.220 IC-OH sample-preparation cartridge (6.1012.X30) 251 Material Anion exchanger in hydroxide form Application For the neutralization of extremely acidic samples. Quantity 50 10 Bed volume 0.5 mL 0.5 mL Capacity 0.6 mmol 0.6 mmol Connection Luer Luer Order number 6.1012.030 6.1012.130 IC-Na sample-preparation cartridge (6.1012.X40) Material Cation exchanger in sodium form Application For the elimination of cations. Quantity 50 Bed volume 0.5 mL Capacity 0.8 mmol Connection Luer Order number 6.1012.040 IC-C18 sample-preparation cartridge (6.1012.X50) Material C18 Application For the removal of non-polar substances; not suitable for F– determination. Quantity 50 Bed volume 0.5 mL Connection Luer Order number 6.1012.050 252 IC accessory parts PEEK inline filter (6.2821.120) 253 The inline filter in the PEEK housing not only removes all particles of mineral origin, but also algae and bacteria. The exclusion diameter of 2 µm ensures that no con- tamination can damage the column or the suppressor. Ordering information PEEK inline filter 6.2821.120 Replacement filters (10 pcs.) 6.2821.130 Coupling safety olive with PEEK inline filter (6.2744.180) The coupling safety olive with PEEK inline filter connects the tube of the peristaltic pump with the following system, e.g. with the suppressor or with the post-column reactor (PCR). On the one hand, this prevents the tube of the peristaltic pump from detaching unintentionally, while on the other hand all particles with a diameter of greater than 2 µm are effectively removed from the flow of liquid. Ordering information Coupling safety olive with PEEK inline filter 6.2744.180 Replacement filters (10 pcs.) 6.2821.130 254 www.metrohm.com witzerland G, CH-9100 Herisau, S ohm A , Printing Metr SW Subject to change without notice. Design Ecknauer+Schoch A 8.000.5245EN – 2018-03